Ricoh 551 User Manual

551/700  
Operating Instructions  
COPY REFERENCE  
Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future  
reference.  
For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.  
Introduction  
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get  
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in  
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.  
Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related  
to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.  
Notes  
Some illustrations may be slightly different from your machine.  
Certain options may not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.  
Operator Safety  
This machine is considered a CDRH class 1 laser device, safe for office/EDP use. The machine con-  
tains two GaAIAs laser diodes, 5-milliwatt, 760-800 nanometer wavelength for each emitter. Direct (or  
indirect reflected ) eye contact with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precau-  
tions and interlock mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to  
the operator.  
Laser Safety:  
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical unit  
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite  
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser  
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis  
and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement or the optical subsystem is re-  
quired.  
Warning:  
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual  
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
Notes:  
The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your ma-  
chine before reading this manual. (For details, see P.1 “Machine Types”.)  
Type1: Aficio 551  
Type2: Aficio 700  
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.  
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.  
For good copy quality, Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner.  
Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other  
than genuine Ricoh parts in your Ricoh office product.  
Power Source  
120V, 60Hz, 20A or more  
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source,  
see P.335 “Power Connection”.  
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:  
a means POWER ON.  
c means STAND BY.  
Copyright © 2000 Ricoh Co., Ltd.  
Introduction  
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get  
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in  
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.  
Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related  
to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.  
Notes  
Some illustrations may be slightly different from your machine.  
Certain options may not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.  
Operator Safety  
This machine is considered a CDRH class 1 laser device, safe for office/EDP use. The machine con-  
tains two GaAIAs laser diodes, 5-milliwatt, 760-800 nanometer wavelength for each emitter. Direct (or  
indirect reflected ) eye contact with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precau-  
tions and interlock mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to  
the operator.  
Laser Safety:  
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical unit  
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite  
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser  
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis  
and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement or the optical subsystem is re-  
quired.  
Warning:  
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual  
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
Notes:  
The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your ma-  
chine before reading this manual. (For details, see P.1 “Machine Types”.)  
Type1: 2055DP, 3355  
Type2: 2070DP, 3370  
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.  
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.  
For good copy quality, Savin recommends that you use genuine toner.  
Savin shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other  
than genuine parts in your office product.  
Power Source  
120V, 60Hz, 20A or more  
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source,  
see P.335 “Power Connection”.  
Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference.  
For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.  
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:  
a means POWER ON.  
c means STAND BY.  
SAVIN CORPORATION  
333 Ludlow Street, Stamford, CT 06904  
203-967-5000  
Safety Information  
When using your equipment, the following safety precautions should always be  
followed.  
Safety During Operation  
In this manual, the following important symbols are used:  
R WARNING:  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions  
are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.  
R CAUTION:  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not  
followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.  
R WARNING:  
Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an ex-  
tension cord.  
Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the  
power cable or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.  
To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do not  
remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this man-  
ual.  
Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug,  
not the cable) if any of the following conditions exists:  
You spill something into the equipment.  
You suspect that your equipment needs service or repair.  
Your equipment's cover has been damaged.  
Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust might ignite  
when exposed to an open flame.  
Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer or at appropriate col-  
lection sites.  
Dispose of the used toner bottle in accordance with the local regula-  
tion.  
i
 
R CAUTION:  
Protect the equipment from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow,  
and so on.  
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the equipment.  
While moving the equipment, you should take care that the power cord will  
not be damaged under the equipment.  
When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the  
plug (not the cable).  
Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside  
the equipment.  
Keep toner (used or unused) and toner bottle out of the reach of children.  
For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the equipment or expended  
supply waste at household waste collection points. Disposal can take place  
at an authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites.  
The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts with a  
label indicating the “hot surface”. Otherwise it could cause a personal burn.  
Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function-  
ality, and we recommend that you only use the expendable supplies avail-  
able at an authorized dealer.  
ii  
How to Read this Manual  
Symbols  
In this manual, the following symbols are used:  
R WARNING:  
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in  
death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the in-  
structions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are in-  
cluded in the Safety Information section.  
R CAUTION:  
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in mi-  
nor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury  
when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this  
symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are included in the Safety  
Information section.  
• WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are notes for your safety.  
Important  
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfeed, originals might be  
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.  
Preparation  
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before op-  
erating.  
Note  
This symbol indicates precautions for operation or actions to take after misoper-  
ation.  
Limitation  
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,  
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.  
Reference  
This symbol indicates a reference.  
[
]
Keys that appear on the machine's display panel.  
{
}
Keys built into the machine's control panel.  
iii  
What You Can Do with This Machine (Copy Mode)................................ 2  
Guide To Components.............................................................................. 4  
Control Panel ............................................................................................. 8  
Displays and Key Operations...................................................................... 10  
Toner......................................................................................................... 27  
Toner Storage ............................................................................................. 27  
Basic Functions....................................................................................... 40  
Adjusting Copy Image Density.................................................................... 40  
Selecting Original Type Setting................................................................... 42  
Selecting Copy Paper ................................................................................. 43  
iv  
To Remove the Paper from the Staple Unit ................................................ 68  
Punch........................................................................................................ 69  
Changing the Number of Sets..................................................................... 92  
Preset Reduce/Enlarge ........................................................................... 94  
Original Direction and Completed Copies................................................. 109  
Originals and Copy Direction .................................................................... 109  
Duplex..................................................................................................... 111  
2 Sided 2 Sided .................................................................................... 113  
Combine................................................................................................. 115  
1 Sided 2 Pages Combine 1 Side......................................................... 117  
1 Sided 4 Pages Combine 1 Side......................................................... 119  
v
1 Sided 8 Pages Combine 1 Side......................................................... 120  
1 Sided 4 Pages Combine 2 Side......................................................... 122  
1 Sided 8 Pages Combine 2 Side......................................................... 123  
1 Sided 16 Pages Combine 2 Side....................................................... 125  
2 Sided 2 Pages Combine 1 Side......................................................... 127  
2 Sided 4 Pages Combine 1 Side......................................................... 128  
Designate.................................................................................................. 156  
User Stamp ............................................................................................... 186  
Page Numbering ....................................................................................... 198  
Features and Benefits........................................................................... 210  
On Demand Printing.................................................................................. 210  
File Merge Printing.................................................................................... 211  
Scanning Originals................................................................................ 212  
vi  
Sample Printing......................................................................................... 218  
To Search by File Name ........................................................................... 219  
Using Connect Copy............................................................................. 230  
Printing Saved Documents with Connect Copy ........................................ 236  
Relationship Between Master Unit and Sub-Unit Copy/  
Combine.................................................................................................... 259  
Loading Paper in Tray 1 (Tandem Tray)................................................... 263  
Loading Paper in Tray 2 or 3..................................................................... 265  
Loading Paper in the Large Capacity Tray................................................ 266  
D Changing the Toner Bottle .............................................................. 268  
x Clearing Misfeeds............................................................................. 270  
vii  
d Adding Staples ................................................................................. 285  
e Removing Jammed Staples............................................................. 293  
Booklet Finisher ........................................................................................ 298  
50-Sheet Finisher...................................................................................... 301  
Accessing the User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features) ......... 305  
Exiting From the User Tools...................................................................... 306  
User Tools Menu (Copy/Document Server Features) ........................ 308  
Settings You Can Change with the User Tools .................................. 310  
General Features / ................................................................................. 310  
General Features / ................................................................................. 313  
General Features / ................................................................................. 314  
3
Reproduction Ratio / .............................................................................. 315  
2
1
2
Page Format / ........................................................................................ 320  
2
Input/Output .............................................................................................. 329  
Access to the Machine.............................................................................. 336  
Maintaining Your Machine.................................................................... 337  
Cleaning the Exposure Glass.................................................................... 337  
Cleaning the Document Feeder ................................................................ 337  
viii  
x
Machine Types  
This machine comes in two models which vary in copy speed. To make sure  
which model you have, see the inside front cover.  
Type 1  
Type 2  
Copy speed  
55 copies/minute (A4K,  
81/2" × 11"K)  
70 copies/minute (A4K,  
81/2" × 11"K)  
1
 
What You Can Do with This Machine (Copy Mode)  
2
 
3
Guide To Components  
ZBQS010N  
1. Document Feeder (ADF)  
7. On indicator  
The document feeder automatically feeds  
a stack of originals one by one.  
This indicator goes on when the opera-  
tion switch is turned on, and goes off  
when the switch is turned off.  
2. Exposure glass  
Place originals here face down for copy-  
ing.  
8. Operation switch  
Press this switch to turn the power on  
(the On indicator goes on). To turn the  
power off, press this switch again (the On  
indicator goes off).  
3. Output tray  
Copied paper is delivered here.  
4. Output tray guide  
9. Control panel  
This guide prevents copied OHP trans-  
parencies and translucent paper from be-  
ing curled when delivered.  
See P.8 “Control Panel”.  
10. Front cover  
Open to access the inside of the machine.  
5. Main power switch  
11. Paper tray  
Set paper here.  
Tray 1 is a tandem tray where the paper  
on the left side automatically moves to  
the right side when the paper on the right  
side has run out.  
If the machine does not operate after  
turning on the operation switch, check if  
the main power switch is turned on. If it  
is off, turn it on.  
6. ADF external tray  
When copying one-sided originals, the  
originals are delivered here.  
4
                       
1. ADF tray  
When copying two-sided originals, the  
originals are delivered here.  
Note  
Even when copying one-sided origi-  
nals, you can select the ADF tray.  
2. ADF external tray  
When copying one-sided originals, the  
originals are delivered here.  
3. Connect Copy port  
Attach the optional Connect Copy cable  
here.  
Important  
Do not connect any other equip-  
ment to the Connect Copy port.  
Be sure to turn off the main power  
switch on both the master unit and  
sub-unit before you disconnect the  
Connect Copy cable. Unplugging  
the cable while power is on could  
damage the machines.  
4. Bypass tray  
Use to copy onto OHP transparencies,  
adhesive labels, translucent paper, post-  
cards, and non-standard size paper.  
5
       
1. Ventilation hole  
Prevents overheating. Do not obstruct  
the ventilation hole by placing or leaning  
an object near it. If the machine over-  
heats, a fault might occur.  
Output Tray Guide  
When copying onto OHP transparencies and translucent paper, raise the guide.  
This prevents copies from being curled when delivered.  
To copy onto normal paper and thick paper  
Pinch the right end of the guide, and then lower it until it clicks into place.  
TSPH020E  
To copy onto OHP transparencies and translucent paper  
Raise the right end of the guide until it clicks.  
TSPH030E  
6
     
Options  
A
B
A
B
A
B
C
1. 50-Sheet Finisher  
3. Output tray (Can be installed  
when the finisher is not installed.)  
Copied paper is delivered here.  
Sorts, stacks, and staples copies. You can  
also punch copies. (The Punch function is  
optional.)  
4. Large Capacity Tray (LCT)  
Holds 3,500 sheets of paper.  
• A: Finisher proof tray  
• B: Finisher shift tray  
5. Booklet Finisher  
2. 100-Sheet Finisher  
Sorts, stacks, and staples copies. The Sad-  
dle Stitch function is also available.  
Sorts, stacks, and staples copies. You can  
also punch copies. (The Punch function is  
optional.)  
• A: Finisher proof tray  
• B: Finisher shift tray  
• C: Booklet tray  
• A: Finisher proof tray  
• B: Finisher shift tray  
Other options:  
• Punch kit  
• Copy Connector kit  
• Tab sheet tray  
• 81/2" × 14" paper size tray (inch version only)  
7
             
Control Panel  
On  
Main Power  
Screen  
User Tools/  
Counter  
Clear Modes/  
Energy Saver  
Program  
Interrupt  
Contrast  
Sample Copy  
Copy  
New Job  
Document Server  
New Job  
Job List  
Start  
Clear/Stop  
Enter  
ZBQS040N  
• Energy Saver  
1. Screen Contrast knob  
Adjusts the brightness of the display pan-  
el.  
Press to switch to and from Energy  
Mode”.  
2. Indicators  
These indicators show errors or the status  
of the machine. See P.247 “What to Do  
If Something Goes Wrong”.  
7. {Interrupt} key  
Press to make interrupt copies during a  
copy run. See P.88 “Interrupt Copy”.  
8. {Sample Copy} key  
3. {User Tools/Counter} key  
• User Tools  
Use this key to make a single sample  
checking the sample copy and making  
any necessary changes to the image qual-  
ity settings before you make multiple  
copies, you can save time and paper. See  
P.91 “Sample Copy”.  
Press to change the default settings  
and conditions to meet your require-  
ments.  
• Counter  
Press to check or print the total num-  
ber of copies made.  
9. On indicator  
See P.305 “User Tools (Copy/Document  
Server Features)”.  
This indicator goes on when the opera-  
tion switch is turned on, and goes off  
when the switch is turned off.  
4. Display panel  
Shows operation status, error messages,  
and function menus. See P.10 “Display  
Panel”.  
10. Main power indicator  
This indicator goes on when the main  
power switch is turned on, and goes off  
when the switch is turned off.  
5. {Program} key  
Press to select the program mode. See ⇒  
11. Operation switch  
P.78 “Programs”.  
Press this switch to turn the power on  
(the On indicator goes on). To turn the  
power off, press this switch again (the On  
indicator goes off).  
6. {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key  
• Clear Modes  
Press to clear any previously entered  
copy job settings.  
8
                           
12. {Start} key  
Press to start copying. Use to set Auto  
Start. See P.90 “Auto Start”.  
13. {Clear/Stop} key  
• Clear  
Press to delete a number entered.  
• Stop  
Press to stop a copy job in progress.  
14. Number keys  
Use to enter the desired number of copies  
and data for selected modes.  
15. {#} key  
Press to enter a value.  
16. Function keys  
Press the appropriate key to choose any  
of the following functions:  
• Copy  
• Document Server  
• Job List  
17. Function indicators  
These indicators go on when the function  
is selected.  
18. Function Status indicator  
These show the status of the above func-  
tions:  
• Green: the function is active.  
• Red: the function has been interrupt-  
ed.  
9
         
Display Panel  
The display panel shows the status of the machine, error messages and function  
menus.  
Important  
Do not apply a strong shock or force of about 30 N (about 3 kgf) or more to  
the display panel. Otherwise, the display might be damaged.  
Note  
The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify  
an item by lightly pressing it.  
When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is highlighted like  
.
Keys appearing as  
cannot be used.  
OK  
Displays and Key Operations  
Note  
The following illustrations are examples for the machine with the optional 50-  
sheet finisher and large capacity tray (LCT) installed.  
Initial copy display  
2
3
4
5
6
1
7
8
9
ZBQS050N  
1. Original mode, Image Density  
5. Job ID of the scanned document.  
6. The number of originals scanned  
into memory, number of copies set,  
and number of copies made.  
and Special Original mode.  
2. Operational status or messages.  
3. The currently selected function  
(Copy, Document Server).  
7. Sort, Stack, Staple or Punch  
mode.  
quently used reduce/enlarge ratios  
other than the fixed reduce/enlarge  
ratios. See “Shortcut R/E” in P.315  
“Reproduction Ratio 1/2.  
Shortcut keys. You can register fre-  
quently used functions in these  
keys. See “Shortcut Keys” in ⇒  
P.314 “General Features 3/3.  
10  
         
9. Shows the available functions.  
Press a function name to display its  
menu. For example, press the [Re-  
duce/Enlarge] key to bring up the Re-  
duce/Enlarge menu.  
Function menu  
1
2
3
ZBQS060N  
1. Items you can select.  
3. The key highlighted with the  
lower line underlined indicates the  
tray feeding the paper.  
2. The [Check Modes] key appears  
when you have selected function(s).  
Press this key to view the functions  
currently selected.  
11  
Document Server initial display  
ZBQS070N  
1. Operational status and messages.  
2. Display titles.  
3. The number of originals scanned  
into memory, number of copies set,  
and number of copies made.  
4. Operational keys.  
12  
Function List Based on Options  
The functions that are available to you depend on your machine configuration  
and which options you have. See the table below.  
…Available  
×…Not available  
50-Sheet/100-  
Booklet Fin- Place originals Connect  
Sheet Finisher isher (Option)  
(Option)  
Copy  
(Option) *3  
Batch (SADF)  
Mixed Sizes  
Thin  
--  
--  
--  
Adjusting Image  
Density  
Selecting Original  
Type  
Selecting Copy Paper  
Auto Reduce/  
Enlarge  
Sort  
*1  
*1  
Rotate Sort  
Stack  
×
×
×
×
×
×
Punch  
Staple  
×
*2  
*4  
Copying from the  
Bypass Tray  
×
*5  
Program  
Job Preset  
×
Reduce/Enlarge  
Zoom  
Size Magnification  
Directional  
Magnification (%)  
Directional Size Mag-  
nification (inch)  
13  
 
50-Sheet/100-  
Booklet Fin- Place originals Connect  
Sheet Finisher isher (Option)  
(Option)  
Copy  
(Option) *3  
1 Sided 2 Sided  
2 Sided 2 Sided  
1 Sided 2 pages →  
1 Side  
1 Sided 4 pages →  
1 Side  
1 Sided 8 pages →  
1 Side  
1 Sided 4 pages →  
2 Side  
1 Sided 8 pages →  
2 Side  
1 Sided 16 pages  
2 Side  
2 Sided 2 pages →  
1 Side  
2 Sided 4 pages →  
1 Side  
2 Sided 8 pages →  
1 Side  
2 Sided 4 pages →  
2 Side  
2 Sided 8 pages →  
2 Side  
2 Sided 16 pages  
2 Side  
14  
50-Sheet/100-  
Booklet Fin- Place originals Connect  
Sheet Finisher isher (Option)  
(Option)  
Copy  
(Option) *3  
Book 1 Sided  
2 Sided 1 Sided  
1 Sided 2 Sided  
2 Sided 2 Sided  
Booklet  
Magazine  
Cover/Designate/  
Chapters  
Slip Sheet  
Double  
Repeat  
Margin Adjust  
Erase  
Centering  
Background  
Numbering  
Preset Stamp  
User Stamp  
*5  
Date Stamp  
Page Numbering  
*1  
You can use this function when “Rotate Sort” is selected in “Select Stack or Rotate  
sort” of the User Tools.  
*2  
*3  
*4  
*5  
The Saddle Stitch function is available.  
When the same type of finishers are equipped with the master and sub-unit.  
You can set only cover sheets and slip sheets.  
The program stored in the master unit is recalled. However, functions not available  
in Connect Copy mode or in the sub-unit are canceled.  
15  
         
16  
1. Basics  
Turning On the Power  
To turn the machine on, press the operation switch.  
Note  
This machine automatically enters Energy Saver mode or turns itself off if you  
do not use the machine for a while. See “Auto Off” in P.29 “Basic Procedure”  
and “Auto Off Timer” in the System Settings manual.  
-Power switches  
This machine has two power switches.  
Operation switch (right side of the control panel)  
Press this switch to activate the machine. When the machine has warmed up,  
you can make copies.  
Main power switch (left side of the machine)  
When the machine is not to be used for an extended period of time, turn off  
the main power switch.  
Turning On the Main Power  
A Make sure that the power cord is firmly plugged into the wall outlet.  
B Turn on the main power switch.  
The main power indicator on the control panel goes on.  
Main Power  
On  
Stand by  
SWN  
17  
         
Basics  
Starting the Machine  
A Press the operation switch to make the On indicator go on.  
The display panel will come on.  
1
On  
Main Power  
Interrupt  
Sample Copy  
Start  
top  
TSPS010N  
Note  
If the power is not turned on when the operation switch is pressed, check  
if the main power switch is on. If off, turn it on.  
During the warm-up period (less than 330 seconds), you can use the Auto  
Start function. See P.90 “Auto Start”.  
You can set up a copy job and press the {Start} key while the “Select modes  
and press the start key. Scanning originals can be started.” message is dis-  
played.  
When “Input user code, then press # .” is displayed, enter your user code.  
See P.90 “User Codes”.  
Shutting Down the Machine  
A Press the operation switch to make the On indicator go off.  
Turning Off the Main Power  
A Turn off the main power switch.  
The main power indicator of the control panel goes off.  
18  
     
Originals  
Originals  
Sizes and Weights of Recommended Originals  
1
Metric version  
Where Original Is  
Set  
Original Size  
Original Weight  
Exposure glass  
Up to A3  
--  
52 – 157g/m2 *2  
52 – 128g/m2  
41 – 157g/m2  
Document feeder  
1-sided originals:  
A3L – A5L  
2-sided originals:  
A3L – A5KL  
Thin originals:  
A3L – B6KL *1  
*1  
Except B6L  
*2  
A5K, B6KL, 52 – 128g/m2  
Inch version  
Where Original Is  
Set  
Original Size  
Original Weight  
Exposure glass  
Up to 11" × 17"  
--  
14 – 42 lb. Bond *1  
14 – 34 lb. Bond  
11 – 42 lb. Bond  
Document feeder  
1-sided originals:  
11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"L  
2-sided originals:  
11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL  
Thin originals:  
11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL  
*1  
51/2" × 81/2"K, 14 – 34 lb. Bond  
Note  
The number of originals that can be set in the document feeder is about 100.  
Non-recommended originals for the document feeder  
Setting the following types of originals in the document feeder can cause paper  
misfeeds or damage to the originals. Set these originals on the exposure glass in-  
stead.  
• Originals other than those specified in P.19 “Sizes and Weights of Recom-  
mended Originals”  
19  
               
Basics  
• Stapled or clipped originals  
• Perforated or torn originals  
• Curled, folded, or creased originals  
• Pasted originals  
1
• Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermal fax paper, art paper, alu-  
minum foil, carbon paper, or conductive paper  
• Originals with perforated lines  
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts  
• Sticky originals such as translucent paper  
• Thin originals that have low stiffness  
• Thick originals such as postcards  
• Originals of inappropriate weight  
• Bound originals such as books  
• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper  
Sizes Detectable by the Auto Paper Select  
Metric version  
81/ 81/ 51/2" 81/  
Size A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 A5 B6 11 11  
8K 16  
× 81/  
2"K  
L
L
L
K
L
K
L
K
L
K
L
" × " ×  
17" 15"  
L
K
K
2" × 2" ×  
2" ×  
13"  
Place  
14"  
L
11"  
K
L
of  
L *1  
L
L
L
origi-  
nal  
Expo-  
sure  
glass  
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Doc-  
umen  
t
×
feed-  
er  
*1  
You can select from 81/2" × 13", 81/4" × 13" and 8" × 13" with the User Tools (System  
Settings). See “<F/F4>Size Setting” in the System Settings manual.  
20  
   
Originals  
Inch version  
81/ 81/ 51/2" 81/  
Size A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 A5 B6 11" 11" 10" 8"  
× 81/  
2"K  
L
L
L
K
L
K
L
K
L
K
L
×
×
×
×
2" × 2" ×  
2" ×  
13"  
Place  
17" 15" 14" 10"  
14"  
L
11"  
K
L
of  
L *1  
L
L
L
L
1
origi-  
nal  
Expo-  
sure  
glass  
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Doc-  
umen  
t
×
×
feed-  
er  
*1  
You can select from 81/2" × 13", 81/4" × 13" and 8" × 13" with the User Tools (System  
Settings). See “<F/F4>Size Setting” in the System Settings manual.  
Sizes difficult to detect  
It is difficult for the machine to detect the sizes of the following originals, so se-  
lect the paper size manually.  
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts  
• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper  
• Dark originals with many letters and drawings  
• Originals which partially contain a solid image  
• Originals which have solid images at their edges  
Missing Image Area  
Exposure glass  
Reference  
position  
A3  
Horizontal size  
Maximum Scanning area  
A3 (297x420mm)  
11"x17" (279x432mm)  
A4 A3  
CP01AEE  
21  
     
Basics  
Document feeder  
1
Limitation  
Even if you correctly set originals in the document feeder or on the exposure  
glass, 3mm (0.1") margins on all four sides might not be copied.  
22  
Copy Paper  
Copy Paper  
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types  
1
The following limitations apply to each tray:  
Metric version  
Inch version  
Paper  
weight  
Paper ca-  
pacity  
*1  
52 – 128g/ 1550 +  
Tray 1  
Tray 2  
A4K, 81/2" × 11"K  
m2, 14 – 34  
1550  
sheets  
lb. Bond  
*6  
A3L, (B4L),  
(A3L), (B4L),  
52 – 128g/ 550 sheets  
m2, 14 – 34  
lb. Bond *6  
A4KL, (B5KL),  
A5KL, (11" × 17"  
L), (81/2" × 14"L),  
(A4KL), (B5KL),  
(A5KL), 11" ×  
17"L, 81/2" × 14"L,  
(81/2" × 11"L), (81/2" 81/2" × 11"KL, (81/  
× 13"K), 81/2" ×  
2" × 13"L), 8" × 101/  
2"L, 8" × 10"L, 8" ×  
13"L, (81/4" ×  
13"L, (8" × 101/  
2"L), (8" × 10"L), (8"  
× 13"L), 81/4" ×  
13"L), 10" × 14"L,  
13"L, (10" × 14"L), (11" × 15"L), 51/2" ×  
(11" × 15"L), (51/2" ×  
81/2"KL, (tab  
stocks)  
81/2"KL) (8KL *8 ),  
(16KKL *9 ), (tab  
Note  
stocks)  
You have to speci-  
fy the paper size  
with the User  
Note  
You have to speci-  
fy the paper size  
with the User  
Tools (System Set-  
tings). See “Paper  
Size Setting” in  
the System Set-  
tings manual.  
Tools (System Set-  
tings). See “Paper  
Size Setting” in  
the System Set-  
tings manual.  
When selecting  
mark on the left.  
See P.282  
When selecting  
paper sizes in pa-  
rentheses, set the  
mark on the left.  
See P.282  
“Changing the Pa-  
per Size”.  
“Changing the Pa-  
per Size”.  
23  
     
Basics  
Metric version  
Inch version  
Paper  
weight  
Paper ca-  
pacity  
Tray 3 *1  
A3L, B4L, A4KL, A3L, B4L, A4KL, 52 – 128g/ 550 sheets  
m2, 14 – 34  
lb. Bond *6  
B5KL, A5KL, 11" B5KL, A5KL, 11"  
× 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L,  
81/2" × 11"KL, 81/2" 81/2" × 11"KL, 81/2"  
1
× 13"L, 8" × 101/2"L, × 13"L, 8" × 101/2"L,  
8" × 10"L, 8" × 13"L, 8" × 10"L, 8" × 13"L,  
81/4" × 13"L, 10" ×  
14"L, 11" × 15"L,  
51/2" × 81/2"KL  
81/4" × 13"L, 10" ×  
14"L, 11" × 15"  
L, 51/2" × 81/2"KL  
A4K, B5K, 81/2" × A4K, B5K, 81/2" ×  
LargeCapacity  
Tray (LCT)  
64 – 105g/ 3,500  
m2, 16 – 24  
lb. Bond  
11"K, 81/2" × 14"K *7  
sheets  
11"K  
By-  
Stan- A3L, B4L, A4KL, A3L, B4L, A4KL, 52 – 157g/ 50 sheets  
m2, 14 lb.  
Bond – 90  
lb. Index  
pass  
dard  
size  
B5KL, A5KL,  
B5KL, A5KL,  
tray *3  
B6L, A6L, 11" × 17" B6L, A6L, 11" × 17"  
L, 81/2" × 14"L,  
L, 81/2" × 11"KL,  
*4 *5  
81/2" × 11"KL, 81/2" 81/2" × 13"L, 8" ×  
52 – 200g/  
m2, 14 lb.  
× 13"L, 8" × 101/2"K 101/2"KL, 8" × 10"  
KL, 8"× 13"L, 81/4" Bond –  
L, 8" × 10"KL, 8" ×  
13"L, 81/4" × 13"L,  
10" × 14"L, 11" × 15"  
L, 51/2" × 81/2"KL  
110 lb. In-  
dex *10  
× 13"L, 10" × 14"L  
11" × 15"L, 51/2" ×  
81/2"KL  
Non- Vertical: 100 –  
Vertical: 4.0" – 11.7" 52 – 157g/ 1 sheet  
m2, 14 lb.  
stan-  
dard  
size  
300mm  
Horizontal: 5.5" –  
Bond – 90  
lb. Index  
Horizontal: 140 –  
432mm  
17.0"  
*2  
52 – 200g/  
m2, 14 lb.  
Bond –  
Postcards, adhesive labels, translucent pa-  
per, OHP transparencies *4  
110 lb. In-  
*1  
*2  
*3  
contact your service representative.  
If you wish to copy onto non-standard size paper, set the paper in the bypass tray  
and specify the size. See P.73 “Copying from the Bypass Tray”.  
If you wish to copy onto OHP transparencies or thick paper, select OHP or Thick Pa-  
per mode. See P.76 “When Copying onto OHP Transparencies or Thick Paper”.  
Always set one sheet at a time. See P.73 “Copying from the Bypass Tray”.  
When setting copy paper, make sure that the stack height does not exceed the limit  
mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at a time depends on the paper  
thickness and condition.  
*4  
*5  
*6  
If you wish to copy onto thick (105g/m2, 28 lb. Bond or heavier) paper, select Thick  
Paper mode. See “Special Paper Indication” in the System Settings manual.  
The optional 81/2" × 14" paper size tray is required to set this size of paper.  
8K (Ba-kai) = 267 × 390mm  
*7  
*8  
*9  
16K (Shi-Liu-kai) = 195 × 267mm  
When the optional 100 sheet finisher is installed.  
24  
*10  
                   
Copy Paper  
Important  
If you use damp or curled paper, a misfeed might occur. In this case, try turn-  
ing over the paper stack in the paper tray. If there is no improvement, change  
to copy paper with less curl.  
1
Note  
When you use the bypass tray, be sure to set the copy paper direction to L.  
Postcards should be fed from the bypass tray.  
If you load paper of the same size and in the same direction in two or more  
trays, the machine automatically shifts to another tray when the tray in use  
runs out of paper. This function is called “Auto Tray Switching”. (If you put  
recycled paper, translucent paper, user color paper 1, or user color paper 2 in  
paper trays with “Special Paper Indication”, this function is not available to  
these trays unless their settings are identical.) This saves interrupting a copy  
run to replenish paper even when you make a large number of copies. You  
can cancel this setting. See “Auto Paper Select” in P.43 “Selecting Copy Pa-  
per”, “Auto Tray Switching” and “Special Paper Indication” in the System  
Settings manual.  
If you select Thick Paper mode or Tab Stock mode, copying speed might be  
reduced.  
Non-recommended Paper  
R CAUTION:  
Do not use aluminum foil, carbon paper, or similar conductive paper to avoid  
a fire or equipment failure.  
Important  
Do not use any of the following kinds of paper or a fault might occur.  
• Thermal fax paper  
• Art paper  
• Aluminum foil  
• Carbon paper  
• Conductive paper  
• Colored OHP transparencies  
• Paper with perforated lines  
• Hemmed paper  
Do not use copy paper that has been already copied on. Otherwise, a paper  
misfeed might occur.  
25  
 
Basics  
Note  
Do not use the following kinds of paper or a misfeed might occur.  
• Bent, folded, or creased paper  
• Torn paper  
1
• Slippery paper  
• Perforated paper  
• Rough paper  
• Thin paper that has low stiffness  
• Paper with much paper dust on its surface  
If you make a copy on rough grain paper, the copy image might be blurred.  
Do not use paper which has been copied or printed on.  
Paper Storage  
Note  
When storing paper, the following precautions should always be followed:  
• Do not store paper where it will be exposed to direct sunlight.  
• Avoid storing paper in humid areas (humidity: 70% or less).  
• Store on a flat surface.  
Keep open reams of papers in the package, and store as you would unopened  
paper.  
Under high temperature and high humidity, or low temperature and low hu-  
midity conditions, store paper in a vinyl bag.  
26  
 
Toner  
Toner  
Handling Toner  
1
R WARNING:  
Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ig-  
nite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of used toner containers  
in accordance with local regulations for plastics.  
R CAUTION:  
Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of children.  
R CAUTION:  
Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function-  
ality, and we recommend that you only use the expendable supplies avail-  
able at an authorized dealer.  
Important  
If you use toner other than the recommended type, a fault might occur.  
Toner Storage  
When storing toner, the following precautions should always be followed:  
• Store toner containers in a cool, dry place free from direct sunlight.  
• Store on a flat surface.  
• Store toner containers laid down.  
Used Toner  
Note  
Used toner cannot be re-used.  
27  
           
Basics  
1
28  
2. Copying  
Basic Procedure  
A Make sure that the machine is in Copy mode.  
If the machine is not in Copy mode, press the {Copy/New Job} key.  
B When the machine is set for the user code, enter the user code with the  
number keys and then press the {#} key.  
Reference  
P.90 “User Codes”.  
C Make sure that there are no previous settings remaining.  
Note  
To clear settings, press the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key.  
D Set your originals.  
Reference  
P.31 “Setting Originals”.  
E Set your desired settings.  
F Enter the number of copies required with the number keys.  
Sample Copy  
Start  
Clear/Stop  
Enter  
TSPS020N  
29  
   
Copying  
Note  
The maximum copy quantity can be set between 1 and 999 (default: 999).  
See “Maximum Copy Quantity” in P.313 “General Features 2/3.  
To change the number entered, press the {Clear/Stop} key and enter the  
new number.  
G Press the {Start} key.  
The machine starts copying.  
2
Note  
When you set originals on the exposure glass, press the {#} key after all  
originals are scanned.  
Usually, when you set a single original on the exposure glass or in the doc-  
functions, copies will be delivered face down.  
You can choose to have copies delivered either face up or face down (ex-  
cept for copying through the bypass tray). See “Face-Up/Down Selection  
in Platen Mode” in P.329 “Input/Output”.  
To stop the machine during the multi-copy run, press the {Clear/Stop} key.  
To return the machine to the initial condition after copying, press the {Clear  
Modes/Energy Saver} key.  
-Auto Reset  
The machine returns to its initial condition automatically when your job is fin-  
ished, after a certain period of time. This function is called “Auto Reset”.  
Note  
You can change the Auto Reset time. See “Auto Reset Timer” in P.310  
“General Features 1/3.  
-Auto Off  
The machine turns itself off automatically after your job is finished, after a cer-  
tain period of time. This function is called “Auto Off”.  
Note  
You can change the Auto Off time. See “Auto Off Timer” in the System Set-  
tings manual.  
30  
   
Setting Originals  
Setting Originals  
Limitation  
Set originals after correction fluid and ink has completely dried. Not taking  
this precaution could mark the exposure glass and cause marks to be copied.  
Note  
2
Basically originals should be aligned to the rear left corner. However, some  
copy functions may produce different results depending on the direction of  
the originals. For details, see the explanations of each function.  
Reference  
P.19 “Originals”.  
Setting Originals on the Exposure Glass  
A Lift the document feeder.  
Important  
Do not open the document feeder with a force. Otherwise, the cover of the  
document feeder might open or be damaged.  
Note  
Be sure to open the document feeder by more than 30°. Otherwise the orig-  
inal size might not be detected correctly.  
31  
         
Copying  
B Set the original face down on the exposure glass. The original should be  
aligned to the rear left corner.  
1
2
2
ND1C01EE  
1: Reference mark  
2: Scale  
Note  
Start with the first page to be copied.  
C Lower the document feeder.  
Setting Originals in the Document Feeder  
Note  
The last page should be on the bottom.  
Do not stack originals beyond the limit mark on the side fence of the docu-  
ment feeder.  
When copying thin originals (40 – 52g/m2, 11 – 14 lb. Bond), set one original  
in the document feeder at a time or place it on the exposure glass to avoid  
damage due to a multi-sheet feed (several pages fed together at the same  
time).  
The original might become dirty if it is written with a pencil or similar tools.  
Usually, one-sided originals are delivered to the ADF external tray, and two-  
sided originals to the ADF tray.  
Reference  
Regarding originals that the document feeder can handle, see P.19 “Origi-  
nals”.  
32  
   
Setting Originals  
A Set the aligned originals face up into the document feeder.  
Setting a stack of originals is completed when the bottom plate rises.  
2
TSPH040E  
Important  
After the bottom plate of the document feeder rises, do not add or force in  
originals.  
Note  
Straighten curls in the originals before setting them in the document feed-  
er.  
To avoid a multi-sheet feed, shuffle the originals before setting them in the  
document feeder.  
You can set the timing for the bottom plate of the document feeder to rise.  
See “ARDF Original Table Rise Time” in P.329 “Input/Output”.  
Original Orientation  
You can set the original orientation separately in the following ways.  
This function is useful for copying torn originals or large originals.  
Standard Orientation  
Select this function when the original direction is the same as the copy paper  
direction.  
90 Turn  
°
This function rotates the copy image by 90°.  
Use this function when you want to copy onto A3, B4, 11" × 17" paper.  
A Press the [Special Original] key.  
33  
 
Copying  
B Select the original orientation.  
Standard Orientation  
A Make sure that the [Standard Orientation] key is selected.  
2
90° Turn  
When you want to copy A3K, B4K or 11" × 17"K size originals, set your  
original in the landscape orientation and then press the [90  
Turn] key. The  
°
machine rotates the original image and you can make copies as you wish. This  
is useful for copying large originals with the Staple, Punch, Duplex, Combine  
or Stamp functions.  
For example, if you want to copy A3K or 11" × 17"K originals with for the  
Staple function configured as shown below:  
34  
Setting Originals  
Note  
It is recommended to use this function together with the Auto Paper Select  
or Preset Reduce/Enlarge function.  
2
GCGSET2E  
A Press the [90  
Turn] key.  
°
C Press the [OK] key.  
35  
Copying  
Setting Special Originals  
Use this function when you want to use Batch (SADF), Mixed Sizes, Thin mode,  
or when you select the original orientation.  
Batch (SADF) mode  
2
Up to 100 standard originals can be set in the document feeder at a time. If there  
are more than 100 originals, set Batch (SADF) mode so that originals can be fed  
automatically without pressing the {Start} key each time they are set in the doc-  
ument feeder.  
Important  
When setting special originals such as translucent paper, set them one by one.  
Note  
In Batch (SADF) mode, even when one original is set in the document feeder,  
the original is automatically fed each time it is set.  
A Press the [Special Original] key.  
B Press the [Batch (SADF)] key.  
C Press the [OK] key.  
D Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
The Auto Feed indicator of the document feeder goes on.  
36  
       
Setting Originals  
E After all the previously set originals are fed, set the next originals while the  
Auto Feed indicator is on.  
The second and subsequent originals can be fed automatically without press-  
ing the {Start} key.  
2
DF02E  
Note  
When the Sort, Combine or Duplex function has been set, press the {#} key  
after all originals are scanned.  
You can change the lighting-up time of the Auto Feed indicator. See “Batch  
(SADF) Auto Reset Time” in P.329 “Input/Output”.  
Mixed Sizes mode  
When originals of different sizes are set on the document feeder at a time, the  
machine automatically checks the size of the originals and makes copies.  
Limitation  
When setting originals of different sizes on the document feeder and making  
copies without using Mixed Sizes mode, parts of the original image might not  
be copied.  
The weight of originals that can be set with this function is 52 – 81g/m2, 14 –  
20 lb. Bond.  
The original sizes that can be set with this function are as follows:  
Metric version  
Inch version  
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL  
11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL  
For smaller originals, the copy image might be slanted since the originals  
might not be correctly aligned with the original guide.  
37  
   
Copying  
A Press the [Special Original] key.  
2
B Press the [Mixed Sizes] key.  
C Press the [OK] key.  
D Align the rear and left edges of the originals as shown in the illustration.  
1
2
CP19AN  
1: Set into the document feeder.  
2: Vertical size  
Important  
If the originals are of different vertical sizes, put the longer original on the  
bottom, otherwise the sizes might not be detected correctly.  
E Adjust the guide to the widest original size.  
F Set the aligned originals face up into the document feeder.  
38  
Setting Originals  
Thin mode  
Use Thin mode if the scanned image is distorted at the edges when copying thin  
(52g/m2, 14 lb. Bond or lighter) originals.  
Important  
Set to Thin mode when you place thin paper into the document feeder, other-  
wise your originals might be damaged.  
2
A Press the [Special Original] key.  
B Press the [Thin] key.  
C Press the [OK] key.  
39  
 
Copying  
Basic Functions  
The following basic functions are explained in this section.  
Adjusting Copy Image Density  
Auto and Manual Image Density  
Selecting Original Type Setting  
Text, Text·Photo, Photo, Pale, Generation Copy  
2
Selecting Copy Paper  
Auto Paper Select and Manual Paper Select  
Auto Reduce/Enlarge  
The machine can choose an appropriate reproduction ratio based on the pa-  
per and original sizes you select.  
Note  
You can select functions to be activated when Auto Reset is turned on, when  
Energy Saver is turned off, or after the machine is powered on. See P.310  
“General Features 1/3.  
You can change default settings for basic functions. See P.310 “Settings You  
Can Change with the User Tools”.  
Adjusting Copy Image Density  
You can adjust the copy image density to match your originals.  
There are three types in this function:  
Auto Image Density  
The machine automatically adjusts the image density.  
Manual Image Density  
If you require darker or lighter copies, adjust the image density yourself.  
Combined Auto and Manual Image Density  
Use when copying originals with a dirty background (such as newspapers).  
You can adjust the foreground density while leaving the background un-  
changed.  
40  
       
Basic Functions  
Note  
In Connect Copy mode, make adjustments to copy image density on the mas-  
ter unit.  
• The image density level set on the master unit will be used by both units,  
However, in order to produce similar images on both units, make sure that  
the “Original Mode Quality Level” settings are the same on each unit. If  
they are not the same, the finish of images may differ. See “Original Mode  
Quality Level” in P.310 “General Features 1/3.  
2
A Select one of Image Density modes.  
Auto Image Density  
A Make sure that the [Auto Image Density] key is selected.  
Note  
If the [Auto Image Density] key is not selected, press the [Auto Image Densi-  
ty] key.  
If you do not wish to set any other functions, press the {Start} key to  
start copying.  
Manual Image Density  
A Press the [Auto Image Density] key to cancel it.  
B Press the [Lighter] or [Darker] key to adjust the image density.  
Note  
If you do not wish to set any other functions, press the {Start} key to  
start copying.  
41  
 
Copying  
Combined Auto and Manual Image Density  
A Make sure that the [Auto Image Density] key is selected.  
B Press the [Lighter] or [Darker] key to adjust the density.  
2
Note  
If you do not wish to set any other functions, press the {Start} key to  
start copying.  
Selecting Original Type Setting  
Select one of the following types to match your originals:  
Text  
Select this mode when your originals contain only letters (no pictures).  
Text·Photo  
Select Text·Photo when your originals contain photographs or pictures with  
letters.  
Photo  
Delicate tones of photographs and pictures can be reproduced with this  
mode.  
Pale  
Select this mode for originals that have lighter lines written in pencil, or for  
faint copied slips. The faint lines will be clearly copied.  
Generation Copy  
If your originals are copies (generation copies), the copy image can be repro-  
duced sharply and clearly.  
Note  
You can directly display the [Original Mode] key on the copy original display.  
See “Original Mode Display” in P.310 “General Features 1/3.  
You can adjust the quality level for each original type. See “Original Mode  
Quality Level” in P.310 “General Features 1/3.  
In Connect Copy mode, make adjustments to the original type on the master  
unit.  
42  
   
Basic Functions  
A Press the appropriate key to select the original type.  
2
Note  
If “Yes” has been selected in “Original Mode Display” of the User Tools,  
press the [Original Mode] key to select the original type, then press the [OK  
]
key. See “Original Mode Display” in P.310 “General Features 1/3.  
If you do not wish to set any other functions, press the {Start} key to start  
copying.  
Selecting Copy Paper  
There are two ways to select copy paper:  
Auto Paper Select  
The machine selects a suitable size of copy paper automatically based on the  
original size and the reproduction ratio. P.46 “Rotated copy”.  
Manual Paper Select  
Choose the tray containing the paper you wish to copy onto: Paper Tray, By-  
pass Tray or large capacity tray (LCT).  
Reference  
P.73 “Copying from the Bypass Tray”.  
Limitation  
Auto Paper Select mode is intended for normal and recycled paper.  
If you set all the paper trays other than “No Display” or “Recycled Paper”,  
you cannot use Auto Paper Select.  
43  
     
Copying  
Note  
See the following table for possible copy paper sizes and directions with Auto  
Paper Select (when copying at a ratio of 100%):  
Metric version  
Where Original Is Set  
Paper Size and Direction  
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" ×  
Exposure glass  
2
13"L *1  
Document feeder  
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL,  
B6KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 81/  
2" × 13"L *1 , 8KL, 16KKL  
*1  
You can select from 81/2" × 13", 81/4" × 13" and 8" × 13" with the User Tools (Sys-  
tem Settings). See “<F/F4>Size Setting” in the System Settings manual.  
Inch version  
Where Original Is Set  
Paper Size and Direction  
11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" ×  
11"KL  
Exposure glass  
A4KL, 11" × 17"L, 11" × 15"L, 81/2" ×  
14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 8" × 10"L, 10" ×  
14"L, 51/2" × 81/2"KL, 81/2" × 13"L *1  
Document feeder  
*1  
You can select from 81/2" × 13", 81/4" × 13" and 8" × 13" with the User Tools (Sys-  
tem Settings). See “<F/F4>Size Setting” in the System Settings manual.  
For some originals, the original size might not be detected correctly. See ⇒  
P.21 “Sizes difficult to detect”.  
When you set special paper, such as recycled paper, in the paper tray, you can  
have the kind of paper shown on the display. See “Special Paper Indication”  
in the System Settings manual.  
In Connect Copy mode, select the copy paper in the master unit.  
• We recommend that both units have the same paper settings. Only paper  
trays loaded with the paper of the same size, direction and type installed  
in both the master unit and sub-unit are available.  
• When you press the [Connect] key, only the paper trays that have the same  
settings in both units are displayed. Other trays are shown grayed out and  
cannot be selected.  
• If the multiple trays are available in Connect Copy mode, each unit selects  
the paper tray detected in each “Paper Tray Priority” setting. See “Paper  
Tray Priority” in the System Settings manual.  
• If the paper tray in use runs out of paper in the sub-unit, the paper tray that  
has the paper identical in size and different in direction is selected, and the  
original image is rotated (if “On (Rotate)” is selected in “Auto Tray Switch-  
ing”). See “Auto Tray Switching” in the System Settings manual.  
44  
   
Basic Functions  
A Select the copy paper.  
Auto Paper Select  
A Make sure that the [Auto Paper Select] key is selected.  
2
Note  
If the [Auto Paper Select] key is not selected, press the [Auto Paper Select  
]
key.  
If you do not wish to set any other functions, press the {Start} key to  
start copying.  
Manual Paper Select  
A Select the paper tray, bypass tray or large capacity tray (LCT).  
Note  
If you do not wish to set any other functions, press the {Start} key to  
start copying.  
45  
Copying  
-Rotated copy  
from that of the paper you are copying onto, this function rotates the original im-  
age by 90° and fits it on the copy paper. This function works when Auto Paper  
Select or Auto Reduce/Enlarge is selected. See “Auto Paper Select” in P.43  
“Selecting Copy Paper” and P.47 “Auto Reduce/Enlarge”.  
2
Original  
Paper Ori- Copy Ori-  
Orientation entation  
entation  
R
GCROTA0E  
Limitation  
You cannot use the Rotated Copy function with Auto Paper Select if the “Au-  
to Tray Switching” setting of the User Tools (System Settings) is set to “On  
(No Rotate)” or “No”. See “Auto Tray Switching” in the System Settings man-  
ual.  
You cannot use the Rotated Copy function when enlarging onto B4 or A3 size  
paper. In this case, set your original in the landscape direction.  
Original Size and Direc-  
tion  
Copy Paper Size and Di-  
rection  
You cannot A4,  
When en-  
larging to A3  
B4,  
rotate:  
B5, or  
A5  
por-  
trait  
R
GCROTA1E  
GCROTA2E  
However,  
you can ro- B5, or  
tate:  
A4,  
When en-  
larging to A3  
B4,  
A5  
land-  
R
R
GCROTA4E  
You cannot use the Rotated Copy function when “Top Slant”, “Left 2” or  
“Saddle Stitch” is selected for stapling or if the Punch function is selected. See  
P.60 “Staple” and P.69 “Punch”.  
46  
 
Basic Functions  
Auto Reduce/Enlarge  
The machine can choose an appropriate reproduction ratio based on the paper  
and original sizes you select.  
2
Limitation  
You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.  
Note  
When you use Auto Reduce/Enlarge, see the following table for possible  
original sizes and directions:  
Metric version  
Where Original Is Set  
Original Size and Direction  
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" ×  
Exposure glass  
13"L *1 , 8KL, 16KKL  
Document feeder  
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL,  
B6KL, 11" × 17"L,11" × 15"L, 81/2" ×  
11"KL, 81/2" × 13"L *1 , 8KL, 16KKL  
*1  
You can select from 81/2" × 13", 81/4" × 13" and 8" × 13" with the User Tools (Sys-  
tem Settings). See “<F/F4>Size Setting” in the System Settings manual.  
Inch version  
Where Original Is Set  
Original Size and Direction  
11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" ×  
11"KL  
Exposure glass  
A4KL, 11" × 17"L, 11" × 15"L, 81/2" ×  
14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/  
2"KL, 81/2" × 13"L *1  
Document feeder  
*1  
You can select from 81/2" × 13", 81/4" × 13" and 8" × 13" with the User Tools (Sys-  
tem Settings). See “<F/F4>Size Setting” in the System Settings manual.  
The reproduction ratios the machine will select are 25 – 400%.  
47  
         
Copying  
For some originals, the original size might not be detected correctly. See ⇒  
P.21 “Sizes difficult to detect”.  
You can set originals of different sizes in the document feeder at a time. See  
P.37 “Mixed Sizes mode”.  
A Press the [Auto Reduce/Enlarge] key.  
2
B Select the paper tray.  
Note  
If you do not wish to set any other functions, press the {Start} key to start  
copying.  
Copying onto Tab Stock  
The options which are required to use this function are as follows:  
Output tray or 100-sheet finisher  
Tab sheet tray  
ZBQY260E  
1. Tab sheet tray  
To make copies onto tab stock, you need to specify the paper type. For details,  
see “Tray 2: Special Paper Indication” in the System Settings manual.  
48  
 
Basic Functions  
2
Preparation  
Select “Tab Stock” in “Tray 2: Special Paper Indication” of the User Tools  
(System Settings). See “Tray 2: Special Paper Indication” in the System Set-  
tings manual.  
Specify the paper size in “Tray 2:Paper Size Setting” of the User Tools (System  
Settings) as follows:  
• Metric version: A4K  
• Inch version: 81/2" × 11"K  
Set the tab stock in tray 2.  
Check the position of the index tab to avoid cropping the image. See “Tray 2:  
Special Paper Indication” in the System Settings manual.  
Limitation  
Use originals which contain only text.  
The image area of one original should be 6% or less of the whole area of the  
original.  
The font size of the letters on the originals should be 16 points or less.  
When using the tab stock, the temperature should be 20ºC, 68ºF or more.  
Important  
Tab stock is always fed starting with the top tab.  
49  
Copying  
3
1
2
2
1. Set originals  
2. Place the tab stocks in tray 2  
3. Make copies  
Use the originals which do not have any images on the top or bottom part of  
the index tab. If the images are on the top or bottom part of the index, the im-  
ages are not copied on the paper, and the machine will be damaged.  
GCINDX6E  
Note  
When copying onto the tab stock, copying speed will be reduced.  
Copies are delivered face down.  
The number of tabs, weights and types of the tab stock that can be placed in  
tray 2 are as follows:  
Number of Tabs  
Weight of Tab  
Stock  
Type of Tab Stock  
160g/m2, 110 lb.  
Index or lighter  
Metric version  
Inch version  
Tab 5  
Small tab only  
(large tab is not  
available)  
Tab 1 – 5, Tab 8,  
Tab 12  
You can store the optional tab sheet tray using the hook which is packed with  
the tab sheet tray.  
A Pull out tray 2 until it stops.  
50  
Basic Functions  
B Adjust the back fence as follows:  
• Metric version: 10" (Paper Size Settings is A4K)  
• Inch version: B5 (Paper Size Settings is 81/2" × 11"K)  
C Attach the tab sheet tray to the back fence in the paper tray.  
D Place the tab stock in the K direction as shown below.  
2
ZBQY280E  
E Select the paper tray (tray 2).  
F Place your originals as follows:  
Exposure glass  
GCINDX4E  
Document feeder  
GCINDX3E  
G Press the {Start} key.  
51  
Copying  
Sort/Stack/Staple  
The machine can scan your originals into memory and automatically sort the  
copies.  
Sort  
• Sort  
2
• Rotate Sort  
Stack (optional finisher required)  
• Stack  
(optional finisher required)  
Staple (optional finisher required)  
50-Sheet/100-Sheet Finisher  
• Top  
• Top Slant  
• Bottom  
• Left 2  
• Top 2 (only when “90º Turn” is selected with the original orientation)  
Booklet Finisher  
• Top Slant  
• Bottom  
• Left 2  
• Top 2 (only when “90º Turn” is selected with the original orientation)  
• Saddle Stitch  
Limitation  
You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.  
Note  
When the number of copies exceeds the tray capacity, remove copies from the  
tray.  
52  
   
Sort/Stack/Staple  
The maximum tray capacity is as follows.  
Metric version  
• A5, B5, A3: 250 sheets (80g/m2)  
• A4, B4: 500 sheets (80g/m2)  
Output tray  
50-Sheet Finisher Finisher proof tray (Without punch):  
• B4 or larger: 50 sheets (80g/m2)  
2
• A4 or smaller: 250 sheets (80g/m2)  
Finisher shift tray (Without punch):  
• A5L: 100 sheets (80g/m2)  
• Except A5L, A4K: 1,500 sheets (80g/m2)  
• A4K: 3,000 sheets (80g/m2)  
100-Sheet Finish- Finisher proof tray (Without punch):  
er  
• B4 or larger: 250 sheets (80g/m2)  
• A4 or smaller: 500 sheets (80g/m2)  
Finisher shift tray (Without punch):  
• A5L: 100 sheets (80g/m2)  
• Except A5L, A4K: 1,500 sheets (80g/m2)  
• A4K: 3,000 sheets (80g/m2)  
Booklet Finisher Finisher proof tray:  
• A4L or larger: 75 sheets (80g/m2)  
• A4K or smaller: 150 sheets (80g/m2)  
Finisher shift tray (Without staple): *1  
• Except A4K, B5K: 500 sheets (80g/m2)  
• A4K, B5K: 1,000 sheets (80g/m2)  
Booklet tray:  
• 1 – 5 sheets: 25 sets (80g/m2)  
• 6 – 10 sheets: 15 sets (80g/m2)  
• 11 – 15 sheets: 10 sets (80g/m2)  
*1  
If you copy when paper remains on the tray, the capacity might be reduced.  
53  
 
Copying  
Inch version  
• 51/2" × 81/2", 11" × 17": 250 sheets (20 lb. Bond)  
Output tray  
• 81/2" × 11", 81/2" × 13": 500 sheets (20 lb. Bond)  
50-Sheet Finisher Finisher proof tray (Without punch):  
• 81/2" × 14" or larger: 50 sheets (20 lb. Bond)  
• 81/2" × 11" or smaller: 250 sheets (20 lb. Bond)  
Finisher shift tray (Without punch):  
2
• 51/2" × 81/2"L: 100 sheets (20 lb. Bond)  
• Except 51/2" × 81/2"L, 81/2" × 11"K: 1,500  
sheets (20 lb. Bond)  
• 81/2" × 11"K: 3,000 sheets (20 lb. Bond)  
100-Sheet Finish- Finisher proof tray (Without punch):  
er  
• 81/2" × 14" or larger: 250 sheets (20 lb. Bond)  
• 81/2" × 11" or smaller: 500 sheets (20 lb. Bond)  
Finisher shift tray (Without punch):  
• 51/2" × 81/2"L: 100 sheets (20 lb. Bond)  
• Except 51/2" × 81/2"L, 81/2" × 11"K: 1,500  
sheets (20 lb. Bond)  
• 81/2" × 11"K: 3,000 sheets (20 lb. Bond)  
Booklet Finisher Finisher proof tray:  
• 81/2" × 11"L or larger: 75 sheets (20 lb. Bond)  
• 81/2" × 11"K or smaller: 150 sheets (20 lb. Bond)  
Finisher shift tray (Without staple): *1  
• Except 81/2" × 11"K: 500 sheets (20 lb. Bond)  
• 81/2" × 11"K: 1,000 sheets (20 lb. Bond)  
Booklet tray:  
• 1 – 5 sheets: 25 sets (20 lb. Bond)  
• 6 – 10 sheets: 15 sets (20 lb. Bond)  
• 11 – 15 sheets: 10 sets (20 lb. Bond)  
*1  
If you copy when paper remains on the tray, the capacity might be reduced.  
54  
 
Sort/Stack/Staple  
Sort  
Copies can be assembled as sets in sequential order.  
Sort  
Copies can be assembled as sets in sequential order.  
2
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
• 50-Sheet/100-Sheet Finisher  
The shift tray moves backward or forward each time the copies of one set  
or those of each job are delivered, causing the next copy to shift when de-  
livered so that you can differentiate each set or job.  
3
2
1
• Booklet Finisher  
The shift tray moves backward or forward each time the copies of one set  
or those of each job are delivered, causing the top sheet of each set to shift  
when delivered so that you can differentiate each set or job.  
3
2
1
GCANSO1E  
Note  
The paper sizes that can be used in the Sort function are as follows:  
Metric version  
Output tray  
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, 8KL, 16KKL  
50-Sheet Finisher A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL  
100-Sheet Finish- A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL  
er  
Booklet Finisher A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5K  
55  
   
Copying  
Inch version  
11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL  
Output tray  
11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL  
50-Sheet Finisher  
11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL  
100-Sheet Finish-  
er  
11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL  
Booklet Finisher  
2
Rotate Sort  
Every other copy set is rotated by 90°KL and delivered to the copy tray.  
3
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
Note  
When the optional finisher is installed, you can switch to or from the Ro-  
tate Sort function with the User Tools. See “Select Stack or Rotate sort” in  
P.329 “Input/Output”.  
The paper sizes that can be used in the Rotate Sort function are as follows:  
Metric version  
A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, 81/2" × 11"KL, 8KL, 16KKL  
Output tray  
50-Sheet Finisher A4KL, B5KL, A5KL  
100-Sheet Finish- A4KL, B5KL, A5KL  
er  
Booklet Finisher A4KL, B5KL  
Inch version  
81/2" × 11"KL  
81/2" × 11"KL  
81/2" × 11"KL  
Output tray  
50-Sheet Finisher  
100-Sheet Finish-  
er  
81/2" × 11"KL  
Booklet Finisher  
Reference  
For the paper capacity of the optional finishers, see P.344 “50-Sheet Fin-  
isher”, P.346 “100-Sheet Finisher” and P.348 “Booklet Finisher”.  
56  
Sort/Stack/Staple  
A Press the [Sort] or [Rotate Sort] key.  
When the finisher is not installed  
When the 50-Sheet/100-Sheet Finisher is installed  
When the booklet finisher is installed  
Note  
2
When the optional finisher is installed, use the User Tools to display [Rotate  
Sort]. See “Select Stack or Rotate sort” in P.329 “Input/Output”.  
B Enter the number of copy sets with the number keys.  
Limitation  
The maximum number of sets is 999.  
Note  
To change the entered number, press the {Clear/Stop} key.  
C Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
57  
Copying  
When setting a stack of originals in the document feeder  
A Set a stack of originals in the document feeder, then press the {Start} key.  
After all the originals are scanned, the copies are delivered to the tray.  
Note  
The last page should be on the bottom.  
2
If an original is misfed during sorted copying, reset your originals in the  
document feeder according to the instructions on the display. The dis-  
play will indicate the number of scanned originals.  
When setting an original on the exposure glass or in the document feeder  
using Batch (SADF) mode  
Reference  
P.36 “Batch (SADF) mode”.  
A Set the original, then press the {Start} key.  
Note  
Start with the first page to be copied.  
B Set the next original. When it is placed on the exposure glass, press the  
{Start} key.  
Note  
Set the original in the same direction as the first one.  
C After all originals are scanned, press the {#} key.  
Stack  
The optional finisher is required to use this function.  
Stack  
This function groups copies of each page in a multi-page original together.  
Every other page stack is shifted for ease of separation. The finisher shift tray  
of the finisher provides this function by sliding from side to side.  
• 50-Sheet/100-Sheet Finisher  
3
2
1
58  
   
Sort/Stack/Staple  
• Booklet Finisher  
GCANSA1E  
2
Note  
The paper sizes that can be used in the Stack function are as follows:  
Metric version  
50-Sheet Finisher A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL  
100-Sheet Finish- A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, 8KL, 16KKL  
er  
Booklet Finisher A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5K  
Inch version  
11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL  
50-Sheet Finisher  
11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL  
100-Sheet Finish-  
er  
Reference  
For the maximum tray capacity of the optional finisher, see P.344 “50-Sheet  
Finisher”, P.346 “100-Sheet Finisher”, and P.348 “Booklet Finisher”.  
A Press the [Stack] key.  
B Enter the number of copies with the number keys.  
Note  
To change the entered number, press the {Clear/Stop} key.  
C Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
59  
Copying  
When setting a stack of originals in the document feeder  
A Set a stack of originals in the document feeder, then press the {Start} key.  
After all the originals are scanned, the copies are delivered to the tray.  
Note  
The last page should be on the bottom.  
2
When setting an original on the exposure glass or in the document feeder  
using Batch (SADF) mode  
Reference  
P.36 “Batch (SADF) mode”.  
A Set the original, then press the {Start} key.  
Note  
Start with the first page to be copied.  
B Set the next original. When it is placed on the exposure glass, press the  
{Start} key.  
Note  
Set the original in the same direction as the first one.  
Staple  
The optional finisher is required to use this function.  
Each copy set can be stapled together.  
Limitation  
You cannot use the following paper in this function:  
• Tab stocks  
• Postcards  
• Translucent paper  
60  
     
Sort/Stack/Staple  
• OHP transparencies  
• Adhesive labels  
• Curled paper  
• Low stiffness paper  
• Paper of different vertical sizes  
Note  
2
For this mode, the following limitation applies. When the number of copies  
exceeds the tray capacity, copying stops. In this case, remove the copies from  
the shift tray and then resume copying.  
Metric version  
With 50-Sheet Finisher With 100-Sheet Finish- With Booklet Finisher  
er  
Paper A3L, B4L, A4KL,  
A3L, B4L, A4KL,  
B5KL, 8KL,  
16KKL  
A3L, B4L, A4K(L)  
*3 , B5K  
size  
B5KL, 8KL,  
16KKL  
Saddle stitch function:  
A3L, B4L, A4L  
Sta-  
(without punch)  
(without punch)  
• A4K or smaller: 50  
sheets (80g/m2)  
pler  
capac-  
ity  
• A4 or smaller: 50  
sheets (80g/m2)  
• A4K, B5K: 100  
sheets (80g/m2)  
• A4L or larger: 30  
sheets (80g/m2)  
• B4 or larger: 30  
sheets (80g/m2)  
• Except A4K, B5K:  
50 sheets (80g/m2)  
• Saddle stitch func-  
tion: 15 sheets (80g/  
m2)  
3,000 sheets (80g/m2)  
3,000 sheets (80g/m2)  
750 sheets (80g/m2) *2  
Shift  
tray  
capac-  
ity  
(A4K  
*1  
)
*1  
Depending on the number of sheets to be stapled and whether sheets have  
punched holes or not, the maximum tray capacity might be reduced.  
If you copy when the paper remains on the tray, the capacity might be reduced.  
Available staple positions are “Top” and “Bottom”.  
*2  
*3  
61  
     
Copying  
Inch version  
With 50-Sheet Finisher With 100-Sheet Finish- With Booklet Finisher  
er  
11" × 17"L, 81/2" ×  
14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL 11"K(L) *3  
Saddle stitch function:  
11" × 17"L, 81/2" ×  
11" × 17"L, 81/2" ×  
Paper  
size  
11" × 17"L, 81/2" ×  
11"L  
2
• 81/2" × 11"K or  
smaller: 50 sheets  
(20 lb. Bond)  
• 81/2" × 11"L or larg-  
er: 30 sheets (20 lb.  
Bond)  
Sta-  
(without punch)  
• 81/2" × 11" or small- • 81/2" × 11"K: 100  
er: 50 sheets (20 lb.  
Bond)  
• 81/2" × 14" or larger:  
30 sheets (20 lb.  
Bond)  
(without punch)  
pler  
capac-  
ity  
sheets (20 lb. Bond)  
• Except81/2"× 11"K:  
50 sheets (20 lb.  
Bond)  
• Saddle stitch func-  
tion: 15 sheets (20 lb.  
Bond)  
Shift  
tray  
capac-  
ity  
3,000 sheets (20 lb.  
Bond)  
3,000 sheets (20 lb.  
Bond)  
750 sheets (20 lb. Bond)  
*2  
(81/2"  
×
11"K)  
*1  
*1  
Depending on the number of sheets to be stapled and whether sheets have  
punched holes or not, the maximum tray capacity might be reduced.  
If you copy when the paper remains on the tray, the capacity might be reduced.  
Available staple positions are “Top” and “Bottom”.  
*2  
*3  
In the following cases, the copies will be delivered to the shift tray without  
stapling.  
• When the number of sheets for one set is over the stapler capacity.  
• When memory reaches 0% during copying.  
When you select Staple, Sort mode is automatically selected.  
Reference  
If you want to add staples, see P.285 d Adding Staples”.  
When staple is jammed, see P.293 e Removing Jammed Staples”.  
62  
   
Sort/Stack/Staple  
Stapling position and original setting  
When there is copy paper that is identical in size and direction as your original,  
stapling positions are as follows:  
50-Sheet /100-Sheet Finisher  
Original setting  
Stapling posi-  
tion  
2
Exposure glass Document  
Feeder  
K
L
K
STAPLEAE  
*1  
L
K
STAPLEBE  
STAPLE25  
STAPLE26  
STAPLECE  
STAPLE27  
L
STAPLE28  
STAPLE30  
STAPLE29  
*1  
K
L
STAPLEDE  
63  
 
Copying  
*2  
K
L
STAPLE22  
STAPLE24  
STAPLE23  
STAPLEEE  
2
STAPLE10  
STAPLE14  
STAPLE20  
*1  
Original images are not rotated. When selecting these stapling positions, set the orig-  
inals in the same direction as copy paper is set.  
This position is available if “90º Turn” is selected with the original orientation.  
*2  
Note  
You cannot change stapling positions during copying.  
When the original image is rotated, the stapling direction turns by 90°.  
With “Top” or “Bottom” selected at the stapling position, if no paper oriented  
in the same direction as the original is available, the image will be rotated and  
the paper of the same size as the original but oriented in the different direc-  
tion will be selected.  
The maximum original image size that can be rotated is as follows:  
Metric version  
Inch version  
A4  
81/2" × 11"  
You cannot use the Rotated Copy function when “Top Slant”or “Left 2” is se-  
lected.  
Booklet Finisher  
Original setting  
Stapling posi-  
tion  
Exposure glass Document  
Feeder  
K
L
STAPLEBE  
64  
   
Sort/Stack/Staple  
K
L
STAPLE25  
STAPLE26  
STAPLECE  
STAPLE27  
2
STAPLE28  
STAPLE30  
STAPLE29  
*1  
K
L
STAPLEDE  
*2  
K
L
L
STAPLE22  
STAPLE24  
STAPLE20  
STAPLE36  
STAPLE23  
STAPLEEE  
STAPLE10  
STAPLE14  
STAPLEFE  
STAPLE34  
STAPLE35  
*1  
*2  
Original images are not rotated. When selecting these stapling positions, set the orig-  
inals in the same direction as copy paper is set.  
This position is available if “90º Turn” is selected with the original orientation.  
Note  
If you select “Top Slant” when using A4L, 81/2" × 11"L or 81/2" × 14"L copy  
paper, the result will be “Top”.  
If you select “Left 2”, the machine will not rotate the image by 90º.  
65  
   
Copying  
If you select “Saddle Stitch”, the machine staples and folds the paper in the  
center, then delivers the paper folded.  
If you select “Saddle Stitch” in Magazine mode, the machine staples the pa-  
per, and folds it like a book, then delivers the paper folded. See P.147 “Mag-  
azine”.  
A Select one of the stapling positions.  
50-Sheet/100-Sheet Finisher  
Booklet Finisher  
Note  
2
If the number of sheets of one set exceeds 15 when using “Saddle Stitch”,  
the message asking you if you wish to “Print” or “Cancel” the job appears.  
If you press the [Print] key, the booklet finisher staples 15 sheets as one set.  
If you press the [Cancel] key, stapling is canceled and you need to remove  
When you select the stapling position, Sort mode is automatically selected.  
Reference  
P.63 “Stapling position and original setting”  
B Enter the number of copy sets with the number keys.  
Note  
To change the entered number, press the {Clear/Stop} key.  
66  
Sort/Stack/Staple  
C Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
When setting a stack of originals in the document feeder  
A Set a stack of originals in the document feeder, then press the {Start} key.  
After all the originals are scanned, the copies are delivered to the tray.  
Note  
2
The last page should be on the bottom.  
When setting an original on the exposure glass or in the document feeder  
using Batch (SADF) mode  
Reference  
P.36 “Batch (SADF) mode”.  
A Set the original, then press the {Start} key.  
Note  
Start with the first page to be copied.  
B Set the next original. When it is placed on the exposure glass, press the  
{Start} key.  
Note  
Set the original in the same direction as the first one.  
C After all originals are scanned, press the {#} key.  
To Stop Scanning Temporarily  
When you are using the Sort, Stack, or Staple function, the originals are scanned  
into memory.  
A Press the {Clear/Stop} key to stop originals from being scanned into memo-  
ry.  
To resume scanning  
A Press the [Resume] key to resume scanning.  
Note  
Scanned images in memory are not cleared.  
To clear scanned images of the originals  
A Press the [Cancel] key.  
Scanning is stopped with the images cleared.  
67  
 
Copying  
When Memory Reaches 0%  
Scanning will be stopped if the size of scanned image data exceeds memory ca-  
pacity.  
Note  
There is enough memory to store approximate 200 to 1,000 originals of A4,  
81/2" × 11" size. The number of originals that can be stored in memory varies  
depending on the memory setting and original type.  
2
Reference  
Scanning will stop when memory reaches 0% during sorted copying. Howev-  
er, you can change this setting so that all the scanned pages are copied and  
delivered to the tray first, then the machine automatically continues scanning  
the remaining originals. See “Memory Full Auto Scan Restart” in P.329 “In-  
put/Output”.  
A Press the {Start} key.  
The scanned pages are delivered to the tray. Then, the image data in memory  
is cleared.  
B Remove the copies and continue copying by following the instructions on  
the display.  
To Remove the Paper from the Staple Unit  
If you cancel the stapling copy job in the middle of the job, the paper might be  
left in the staple unit. In this case, remove the paper from the staple unit.  
A Press the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key to cancel the copy settings.  
B Set the next original, then press the {Start} key.  
The paper left in the staple unit is automatically delivered, then the next job  
starts.  
Note  
When the paper is not delivered and the message is displayed, follow the  
instructions on the display to remove the paper.  
68  
   
Punch  
Punch  
The optional finisher and punch kit are required to use this function.  
This function is used to make punch holes in copies.  
2 holes  
3 holes  
4 holes  
Note  
2
The relationship between the direction in which you set the original and the  
punch hole positions is as follows:  
69  
     
Copying  
Punch hole positions  
Direction in which Original Is Set  
Exposure glass Document feeder  
Punch Hole Posi-  
tions  
2 holes  
3 holes  
4 holes  
K
2
L
K
L
K
L
70  
Punch  
2 holes  
K
L
K
2
3 holes  
L
K
4 holes  
L
Punchable paper sizes are as follows:  
A3L – A5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L – 51/2"  
2 holes  
× 81/2"KL  
A3L, B4L, A4K, B5K, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 11"K  
3 holes  
A3L, A4K, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 11"K  
4 holes Metric version  
A3L – A5K, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L – 51/2" ×  
Scandinavian version  
81/2"K  
Since punch holes are made in each copy, the punch hole positions vary  
slightly.  
The punch hole positions change according to the direction of the paper se-  
lected.  
Reference  
If the punch waste box fills up, see P.301 y Removing Punch Waste”.  
71  
Copying  
A Select the Punch position.  
2
Note  
When stapling copies, also select a stapling position. See P.60 “Staple”.  
B Enter the number of copy sets with the number keys.  
Note  
To change the entered number, press the {Clear/Stop} key.  
If you wish to use the Sort function, press the [Sort] key.  
C Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
72  
Copying from the Bypass Tray  
Copying from the Bypass Tray  
Use the bypass tray to copy onto OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, translu-  
cent paper, postcards, and copy paper that cannot be set in the paper tray.  
Limitation  
When copying several originals using the bypass tray, copies are delivered  
face up (“Face Up Exit”) and in reverse order by default.  
2
You can change the setting to “Face Down Exit” only when you are using  
high quality copy paper with a weight of 52 – 105g/m2 (14 – 28 lb. Bond). See  
“Face-Up/Down Selection in Bypass Mode” in P.331 “Count Manager”.  
If you have copies delivered face down when copying onto special paper,  
such as adhesive labels, a paper misfeed may occur. Be sure to select “Face Up  
Exit”.  
Note  
If you wish to have copies delivered face down when only one original is set  
on the exposure glass or in the document feeder, you must set the “Face-Up/  
Down Selection in Bypass Mode” setting to “Face Down Exit” and the “Face-  
Up/Down Selection in Platen Mode” setting to “Face Down Exit” with the  
User Tools. See “Face-Up/Down Selection in Bypass Mode” in P.331  
“Count Manager” and “Face-Up/Down Selection in Platen Mode” in P.329  
“Input/Output”.  
The machine can automatically detect the following sizes as standard size  
copy paper:  
Metric version  
Inch version  
A3L, A4L, A5L  
A3L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"L, 8" × 101/2"K, 8"  
× 10"K, 51/2" × 81/2"L  
If you do not use the standard size copy paper, you should input vertical and  
horizontal dimensions. The sizes that you can input are as follows:  
Metric version  
Inch version  
• Vertical: 100 – 300mm  
• Horizontal: 140 – 432mm  
• Vertical: 4.0" – 11.7"  
• Horizontal: 5.6" – 17.0"  
To make copies onto OHP transparencies or thick paper exceeding 105g/m2,  
28 lb. Bond, specify the paper type in P.76 “When Copying onto OHP Trans-  
parencies or Thick Paper”.  
The maximum number of sheets you can set at a time depends on the paper  
type. For details about paper capacity of the bypass tray, see P.23 “Copy Pa-  
per”.  
73  
     
Copying  
In Connect Copy mode, you can set only cover sheet paper and slip sheet pa-  
per for the Cover/Slip Sheet function in the bypass tray.  
A Open the bypass tray.  
2
ZBQH050E  
B Adjust the guides to copy paper size.  
Important  
If the guides are not flush with the copy paper, a skew image or paper mis-  
feeds might occur.  
C Lightly insert the copy paper face up until the beeper sounds.  
The k indicator on the display automatically goes on.  
1
ZBQH040E  
1. Extender  
Note  
The face side of the paper set is copied on.  
Do not stack paper over the limit mark, otherwise a skew image or paper  
misfeeds might occur.  
If the beeper is turned off, lightly insert the copy paper until it stops. See  
“Operation Panel Beeper” in the System Settings manual.  
When the document feeder is open, set the direction of the copy paper to  
L.  
74  
 
Copying from the Bypass Tray  
Swing out the extender to support paper sizes larger than A4L, 81/2" ×  
11"L.  
Fan paper to get air between the sheets and avoid a multi-sheet feed.  
Before setting, adjust the paper if curled or warped.  
When copying onto non-standard size paper  
2
Important  
You should specify the size of copy paper to avoid paper misfeeds.  
A Press the {#} key.  
B Press the [Non Standard] key.  
C Press the [Vert inch] key and enter the vertical size of the paper with the  
number keys, then press the [  
#] key.  
Note  
To change the number entered, press the [Clear] or {Clear/Stop} key and  
enter the new number.  
D Enter the horizontal size of the paper with the number keys, then press  
the [  
#] key.  
Note  
If the [Horz inch] key is not highlighted, press the [Horz inch] key.  
To change the number entered, press the [Clear] or {Clear/Stop} key and  
enter the new number.  
E To register the non-standard size entered, press the [Store] key and then  
press the [Cancel] key.  
75  
Copying  
Note  
If you do not register the non-standard size, go to step F.  
Only one non-standard size can be stored.  
To recall the non-standard size stored, press the [Recall] key.  
If you do not register the non-standard size, the size you set is deleted  
when modes are cleared.  
F Press the [OK] key.  
2
D Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
E When your copy job is finished, press the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key to  
clear the settings.  
When Copying onto OHP Transparencies or Thick Paper  
To make copies onto OHP transparencies or thick paper, you need to specify the  
paper type.  
When you select “OHP” or “Thick Paper”, copy paper is delivered face up  
even if you have set the “Face-Up/Down Selection in Bypass Mode” setting  
to “Face Down Exit”. See “Face-Up/Down Selection in Bypass Mode” in ⇒  
P.331 “Count Manager”.  
Note  
Select [Thick Paper] if the paper weight is more than 105g/m2, 28 lb. Bond.  
A Open the bypass tray, and adjust the guides to the paper size.  
Important  
If the guides are not flush with the copy paper, a skew image or paper mis-  
feeds might occur.  
B Lightly insert the OHP transparencies or thick paper face up until the beep-  
er sounds.  
The k indicator on the display automatically goes on.  
Note  
When you set an OHP transparency, make sure that its front and back faces  
are properly positioned.  
To avoid paper misfeeds, fan the paper before setting it in the tray.  
C Press the {#} key.  
76  
   
Copying from the Bypass Tray  
D Select [OHP] or [Thick Paper].  
2
E Press the [OK] key.  
F Set your originals and press the {Start} key.  
Important  
When copying onto OHP transparencies, remove copied sheets one by  
one.  
G When your copy job is finished, press the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key to  
clear the settings.  
77  
Copying  
Programs  
You can store frequently used copy job settings in machine memory, and recall  
them for future use.  
Limitation  
You cannot store the settings whether the Connect Copy function will be se-  
lected automatically in a program.  
2
Storing Your Settings  
You can store your settings you frequently use.  
Deleting A Program  
You can delete a stored program.  
Recalling A Program  
You can recall a stored program.  
Note  
You can store up to ten programs.  
You can select the standard mode or program No. 10 as the mode to be set  
when modes are cleared or reset is made, or immediately after the operation  
switch is turned on. See “Initial Mode” in P.313 “General Features 2/3.  
Paper settings are stored based on paper size. So if you place more than one  
paper tray of the same size, the paper tray prioritized with the User Tools  
(System Settings) will be selected first. See “Paper Tray Priority” in the Sys-  
tem Settings manual.  
Programs are not cleared by turning the power off or by pressing the {Clear  
Modes/Energy Saver} key. They are canceled only when you delete or overwrite  
them with another program.  
If your program contains settings that are not available in Connect Copy  
mode, they are ignored in Connect Copy mode.  
If your program contains settings that are not available on the sub-unit, they  
are ignored in Connect Copy mode.  
Storing a Program  
A Edit the copy settings so that all functions you want to store in this program  
are selected.  
78  
       
Programs  
B Press the {Program} key.  
Clear Modes/  
Energy Saver  
Program  
Interrupt  
TSPS030N  
C Press the [Store] key.  
2
D Press the program number you want to store.  
Note  
Program numbers with m already have settings in them.  
Reference  
P.80 “Changing a Stored Program”  
E Enter the program name with the letter keys on the display panel.  
Note  
If you do not wish to enter the program name, go to step F.  
You can register up to 25 characters.  
To change the name entered, press the [Back Space], [Clear] or {Clear/Stop}  
key and enter new letters.  
F Press the [OK] key.  
When the settings are successfully stored, the m indicator goes on.  
79  
Copying  
Changing a Stored Program  
Note  
When you want to check the contents of the program, recall the program.  
See P.81 “Recalling a Program”.  
2
B Repeat steps A to D in Storing a Program.  
To overwrite the program  
Important  
If you select [Delete], the previous program is lost.  
A Press the [Delete] key.  
B Repeat steps E and F in Storing a Program.  
Not to overwrite the program  
A Press the [Don't delete] key.  
Deleting a Program  
A Press the {Program} key.  
Clear Modes/  
Energy Saver  
Program  
Interrupt  
TSPS030N  
80  
         
Programs  
B Press the [Delete] key.  
2
C Press the program number you want to delete.  
D Press the [Delete] key.  
Note  
To cancel the deletion, press the [Don't delete] key.  
Recalling a Program  
A Press the {Program} key.  
Clear Modes/  
Energy Saver  
Program  
Interrupt  
TSPS030N  
B Press the [Recall] key.  
81  
     
Copying  
C Press the program number you want to recall.  
The stored settings are displayed.  
Note  
Only programs with m contain a program.  
D Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
2
82  
Job Preset  
Job Preset  
If a long copy job is in progress and you do not wish to wait for it to finish, you  
can use this function to set up the next copy job in advance. When the current  
copy job is finished, your copy job will be started automatically.  
Limitation  
You cannot combine the Job Preset function with the Connect Copy function  
2
(option).  
Note  
The maximum number of job sets that you can set with this function is 8.  
You can use this function for the documents stored in the Document Server.  
A Press the {Copy/New Job} key.  
Copy  
New Job  
Document Server  
New Job  
Job List  
ZBQS080N  
B Set up the next copy job.  
83  
   
Copying  
Note  
The receipt number (preset number) of the preset job is displayed on the  
upper right of the display panel.  
To cancel this job, press the [Cancel] key.  
C Set the originals in the document feeder and press the {Start} key.  
After all originals are scanned, the Job List is displayed.  
2
D Press the [Return to menu in printing] key.  
After the current copy job, the next job starts automatically.  
Note  
You can switch the display to the current copy job by pressing the [Return  
to menu in printing] or [Return to menu in scanning] key. You can switch the dis-  
play to the preset job by pressing the [Return to menu in setting new job] key.  
Editing Job Preset  
A Press the {Job List} key.  
Copy  
New Job  
Document Server  
New Job  
Job List  
ZBQS090N  
Note  
You can confirm the preset number, time to end, number of originals,  
number of copy sets, and functions you use in the job status list.  
B Press the preset job you want to change.  
84  
 
Job Preset  
Note  
If the desired job is not shown and more than 5 jobs are preset, press the  
[T5 ] key to display the desired job.  
8
2
C Press the [Check Modes//Change] key.  
D Change the settings.  
E Press the [Return to job status menu] key.  
F Press the [Yes] key.  
Note  
To cancel the changes, press the [No] key.  
G If you want to change the settings for other preset jobs, repeat steps B to F.  
H Press the [Return to menu in printing] key.  
The initial display reappears.  
85  
Copying  
Note  
Depending on the condition of the current copy job, the [Return to menu in  
setting new job] or [Return to menu in scanning] key might be displayed. In this  
case, press the [Return to menu in setting new job] or [Return to menu in scanning  
key.  
]
Deleting Job Preset  
2
You can delete the preset job in the Job List or Check modes display. The follow-  
ing procedure describes how to delete the preset job in the Job List display.  
A Press the {Job List} key.  
Copy  
New Job  
Document Server  
New Job  
Job List  
ZBQS090N  
B Press the preset job you want to delete, then press the [Delete preset jobs] key.  
Note  
If you delete the preset job in the Check modes display, press the [Cancel  
]
key in the Check modes display.  
If the desired job is not shown and more than 5 jobs are preset, press the  
[T5 ] key to display the desired job.  
8
86  
 
Job Preset  
C Press the [Cancel] key.  
2
Note  
To cancel the deletion, press the [Resume] key.  
D If you want to delete other preset jobs, repeat steps B and C.  
E Press the [Return to menu in printing] key.  
The initial display reappears.  
Note  
Depending on the condition of the current copy job, the [Return to menu in  
preset mode] or [Return to menu in scanning] key might be displayed. In this  
case, press the [Return to menu in preset mode] or [Return to menu in scanning  
]
key.  
87  
Copying  
Other Functions  
Energy Saver Mode  
If you do not operate the machine for a certain period after copying, or when you  
press and hold the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key for more than one second, the  
display disappears and the machine enters Energy Saver mode. When you press  
the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key again, when the originals are set in the docu-  
ment feeder, or when the document feeder is opened, the machine returns to the  
ready condition. In Energy Saver mode, the machine uses less electricity.  
2
Energy Saver mode makes a two-step reduction in electricity: one for the period  
up to the time set for Low Power mode, the other for the period after that time.  
Note  
If you press the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key during the operation, the cur-  
rent settings will be cleared.  
It takes about 10 seconds to return to the ready condition from Energy Saver  
mode.  
It takes about 30 seconds to return to the ready condition from Low Power  
mode.  
If you press the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key while setting Connect Copy,  
Connect Copy mode is canceled and the machine returns to the initial condi-  
tion of Copy mode.  
If you press the [Connect] key on the master unit, the sub-unit exits Energy  
Saver mode and enters Connect Copy mode.  
In Connect Copy mode, the sub-unit will not enter Energy Saver mode.  
Reference  
See “Low Power Timer” in the System Settings manual.  
Interrupt Copy  
Use this function if you wish to interrupt a long copy job to make urgently need-  
ed copies.  
Note  
The procedure for making interrupt copies depends on which kind of opera-  
tion the machine is currently carrying out.  
You can use Document Server mode in Interrupt Copy mode.  
In Connect Copy mode, you cannot use the Interrupt Copy function on the  
master unit.  
In Connect Copy mode, you cannot use the Interrupt Copy function on the  
sub-unit while the master unit is scanning an original.  
88  
         
Other Functions  
In Connect Copy mode, you cannot use the Interrupt Copy function when  
memory on the sub-unit is full.  
In Connect Copy mode, after finishing the interrupt copy job on the sub-unit,  
be sure to exit Interrupt mode on the sub-unit. When you exit Interrupt mode,  
the two machines automatically share the rest of the connect copy job.  
In Connect Copy mode, if the connect copy job is finished before finishing the  
interrupt copy job on the sub-unit, be sure to exit Interrupt mode on the sub-  
unit. If you do not exit Interrupt mode, the next connect copy job cannot be  
started.  
2
To interrupt an original being fed  
A Press the {Interrupt} key.  
The Interrupt indicator goes on and scanning stops.  
B Remove the originals that were being copied and set the originals you wish  
to copy.  
C Press the {Start} key.  
The machine starts making your copies.  
D When your copy job is finished, remove your originals and copies.  
E Press the {Interrupt} key again.  
The Interrupt indicator goes off.  
F When the display prompts you to, replace the originals that were being  
copied before.  
G Press the {Start} key.  
The previous copy job settings will be restored and the machine will continue  
copying from where it left off.  
To interrupt copying after all originals have been fed  
A Press the {Interrupt} key.  
The Interrupt indicator goes on.  
Note  
Copying will not stop yet.  
B Set your original.  
C Press the {Start} key.  
The machine stops the original job and starts copying your original.  
89  
Copying  
D When copying is complete, remove your originals and copies.  
E Press the {Interrupt} key again.  
The Interrupt indicator goes off.  
The previous copy job settings will be restored and the machine will continue  
copying from where it left off.  
2
User Codes  
If the machine is set to use the User Code function, operators must input their  
user codes before the machine can be operated. The machine keeps count of the  
number of copies made under each user code.  
Note  
When the machine is set for the user codes, the machine will prompt you for  
your user codes after the operation switch is turned on or Auto Reset comes  
into effect.  
You can adjust how long the machine waits before switching to the user code  
input display. See “Auto Reset Timer” in P.310 “General Features 1/3.  
To prevent others from making copies using your user code, press the {Clear  
Modes/Energy Saver} and {Clear/Stop} keys simultaneously after copying.  
You can turn the User Codes on or off with the master unit User Tools (Sys-  
tem Settings). See “Set User Codes” in the System Settings manual.  
You can monitor the total number of copies made by the master unit and sub-  
unit with the master unit User Codes function.  
If the User Codes are set to on in the sub-unit and a code has been entered be-  
fore Connect Copy was selected, the master unit cannot monitor the number  
of copies made.  
If the User Codes are set only in the sub-unit, you can enter Connect Copy  
mode and make copies without entering a code. In this case the number of  
copies made will not be monitored.  
Reference  
For how to set up the user codes, see “Set User Codes” in the System Settings  
manual.  
For how to register, change and delete the user codes, see “User Code Regis-  
ter/Change/Delete” in P.331 “Count Manager”.  
Auto Start  
If you press the {Start} key during the warm-up period, the {Start} key will  
blink, and your copies will be made as soon as warm-up finishes.  
A Make any adjustments to copy settings during the warm-up period.  
90  
         
Other Functions  
B Set your originals.  
C Press the {Start} key.  
Copying automatically starts when the {Start} key indicator flashes red and  
green and the machine is ready for copying.  
Note  
In Connect Copy mode, copying starts when the master unit is ready for  
2
copying.  
To cancel Auto Start, press the {Clear/Stop} key.  
In Connect Copy mode, press the {Clear/Stop} key on the master unit to  
cancel Auto Start.  
Original Beeper  
The beeper sounds and an error message is displayed when you leave your orig-  
inals on the exposure glass after copying.  
Note  
You can adjust when the beeper sounds with the “Auto Response (Human)  
Sensor” setting:  
• If set to “Yes”, the beeper sounds as soon as you leave the machine after  
copying.  
• If set to “No”, the beeper sounds 2 seconds after copying. See “Auto Re-  
sponse (Human) Sensor” in the System Settings manual.  
To cancel this function, see “Original Beeper” in P.313 “General Features 2/  
3.  
Sample Copy  
Use this function to check a copy set before making a long copy run.  
Limitation  
This function can be used only when the Sort function has been turned on.  
Note  
This function is only available on the master unit in Connect Copy mode.  
A Select Sort and any other functions, then enter the number of copy sets to  
be made.  
B Set the originals.  
C Press the {Sample Copy} key.  
One copy set is delivered for proof copying.  
91  
       
Copying  
D After checking the finish, press the [Resume] key if the sample is acceptable.  
The number of copies made is the number you specified minus one for the  
proof copy.  
Note  
If you press the [Cancel] key after checking the finish, return to step A to ad-  
just the copy settings as necessary. You can change the settings for Staple,  
Punch, Duplex, Copy Orientation, Stamp, Margin Adjust, and Cover/Slip  
Sheet. However, depending on the combinations of functions, some set-  
tings might not be changed.  
2
Changing the Number of Sets  
You can change the number of copy sets during copying.  
Limitation  
This function can be used only when the Sort function has been turned on.  
A Press the {Clear/Stop} key when “Copying” is displayed.  
Sample Copy  
Start  
Clear/Stop  
Enter  
TSPS020N  
B Press the [Change No. of sets] key.  
92  
 
Other Functions  
C Enter the number of copy sets with the number keys, then press the {#  
}
key.  
2
Note  
The number of sets you can enter differs depending on the timing of press-  
ing the {Clear/Stop} key.  
To change the entered number, press the {Clear/Stop} key.  
D Press the [Resume] key.  
93  
Copying  
Preset Reduce/Enlarge  
You can select a preset ratio for copying.  
2
Note  
You can select one of 11 preset ratios (5 enlargement ratios, 6 reduction ra-  
tios).  
center as reference. You can register this function in a shortcut key on the ini-  
tial display.  
You can change the preset ratios to other ratios you frequently use. See “En-  
large” in P.315 “Reproduction Ratio 1/2and “Reduce” in P.316 “Reproduc-  
tion Ratio 2/2.  
You can set and display three kinds of ratio on the initial display. See “Short-  
cut R/E” in P.315 “Reproduction Ratio 1/2.  
You can specify which of [Reduce], [Enlarge] or [Input Ratio] is to be given pri-  
ority and displayed when the [Reduce/Enlarge] key is pressed. See “R/E Prior-  
ity” in P.315 “Reproduction Ratio 1/2.  
You can select a ratio regardless of the size of an original or copy paper. With  
some ratios, parts of the image might not be copied or margins will appear on  
copies.  
Copies can be reduced or enlarged as follows:  
Metric version  
Ratio (%)  
Original Copy paper size  
400 (enlarge area by 16)  
--  
200 (enlarge area by 4)  
A5A3  
141 (enlarge area by 2)  
A4A3, A5A4  
FA3, A4B4  
B4A3  
122  
115  
93  
--  
94  
   
Preset Reduce/Enlarge  
Ratio (%)  
Original Copy paper size  
82  
75  
FA4, B4A4  
B4F4, B4F  
A3A4, A4A5  
71 (reduce area by 1/2)  
65  
A3F  
50 (reduce area by 1/4)  
A3A5, FA5  
2
Inch version  
Ratio (%)  
Original Copy paper size  
400 (enlarge area by 16)  
200 (enlarge area by 4)  
--  
51/2" × 81/2"11" × 17"  
51/2" × 81/2"81/2" × 14"  
155 (enlarge area by 2)  
81/2" × 11"11" × 17"  
81/2" × 14"11" × 17"  
--  
129  
121  
93  
85  
F81/2" × 11"  
81/2" × 14"81/2" × 11"  
78  
73  
65  
11" × 15"81/2" × 11"  
11" × 17"81/2" × 11"  
11" × 17"51/2" × 81/2"  
50 (reduce area by 1/4)  
A Press the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.  
Note  
To select a preset ratio on the initial display, directly press the shortcut re-  
duce/enlarge key and go to step E.  
95  
Copying  
B Press the [Enlarge] or [Reduce] key.  
2
C Select a ratio.  
D Press the [OK] key.  
E Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
Shrink&Center mode  
Use “Shrink&Center” to reduce the image by 93% of its original size with the  
center position as reference. You can register this function in a shortcut key on  
the initial display. By combining it with the Reduce/Enlarge function, you can  
Note  
You can register “Shrink&Center” in a shortcut key. See “Shortcut Keys” in  
P.314 “General Features 3/3.  
You can change the Reduce/Enlarge ratio for “Shrink&Center”. See  
“Shrink&Center Ratio” in P.316 “Reproduction Ratio 2/2.  
A Press the [Shrink&Center] key displayed on the initial display.  
B If you do not wish to combine it with the Reduce/Enlarge function, set your  
originals, then press the {Start} key.  
96  
 
Zoom  
Zoom  
You can change the reproduction ratio in 1% steps.  
2
Note  
The following ratios can be selected:  
• Metric version: 25 – 400%  
• Inch version: 25 – 400%  
You can select a ratio regardless of the size of an original or copy paper. With  
some ratios, parts of the image might not be copied or margins will appear on  
copies.  
You can select a preset ratio which is near the desired ratio, then adjust the  
ratio with the [n] or [o] key.  
A Press the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.  
97  
   
Copying  
B Enter the ratio.  
To select the ratio with the [n] and [o] keys  
A Select a preset ratio which is close to the desired ratio by using [Reduce  
]
or [Enlarge].  
2
B Adjust the ratios with the [n] or [o] key.  
Note  
To change the ratio in 1% steps, just press the [n] or [o] key. To change  
the ratio in 10% steps, press and hold down the [n] or [o] key.  
To enter the ratio with the number keys  
A Press the [Input Ratio] key.  
B Enter the desired ratio with the number keys.  
Note  
To change the ratio entered, press the [Clear] or {Clear/Stop} key and en-  
ter the new ratio.  
C Press the [  
#] key.  
D Press the [OK] key.  
C Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
98  
Size Magnification  
Size Magnification  
This function calculates an enlargement or reduction ratio based upon the  
lengths of the original and copy.  
2
A"  
a"  
Preparation  
Measure and specify the lengths of the original and copy by comparing “A”  
with “a.”  
Limitation  
If the calculated ratio is over the maximum or under the minimum ratio, it is  
corrected within the range of the ratio automatically. However, with some ra-  
tios, parts of the image might not be copied or blank margins will appear on  
copies.  
Note  
A ratio is selected in the range of 25 to 400%.  
A Press the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.  
99  
 
Copying  
B Press the [Size Mag.] key.  
2
C Make sure that the [Size Mag.] key is highlighted.  
D Enter the length of the original with the number keys and press the [  
#] key.  
Note  
You can enter sizes within the following ranges:  
Metric version  
Inch version  
1 – 999mm (in 1mm steps)  
0.1" – 99.9" (in 0.1" steps)  
To change the length entered, press the [Clear] or {Clear/Stop} key and enter  
the new length.  
E Enter the length of the copy with the number keys and press the [  
#] key.  
Note  
To change the length entered, press the [Clear] or {Clear/Stop} key and enter  
the new length.  
To change the length after pressing the [  
#] key, select [Original] or [Copy]  
and enter the desired length.  
F Press the [OK] key.  
G Press the [OK] key.  
H Set your original, then press the {Start} key.  
100  
Directional Magnification (%)  
Directional Magnification (%)  
Copies can be reduced or enlarged at different reproduction ratios horizontally  
and vertically.  
a%  
2
b%  
CP2P01EE  
Note  
The following ratios can be selected:  
• Metric version: 25 – 400%  
• Inch version: 25 – 400%  
You can select a ratio regardless of the size of an original or copy paper. With  
some ratios, parts of the image might not be copied or blank margins will ap-  
pear on copies.  
You can also select a preset ratio which is close to the desired ratio by using  
Reduce or Enlarge, then adjust the ratio with the [n] or [o] key.  
A Press the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.  
101  
   
Copying  
B Press the [Size Mag.] key.  
2
C Press the [D. Mag.(%)] key.  
To specify a ratio with the [n] and [o] keys  
A Press the [no Keys] key.  
B Press the [Horizontal] key.  
C Adjust the ratio using the [n] or [o] key.  
Note  
Pressing the [n] or [o] key changes the ratio in 1% steps. Pressing and  
holding down the [n] or [o] key changes it in 10% steps.  
If you have incorrectly entered the ratio, readjust the ratio with the [n]  
or [o] key.  
D Press the [Vertical] key.  
E Adjust the ratio with the [n] or [o] key.  
F Press the [OK] key.  
102  
Directional Magnification (%)  
To enter the ratio with the number keys  
A Press the [Horizontal] key.  
2
B Enter the desired ratio with the number keys, followed by the [  
#] key.  
Note  
To change the ratio entered, press the [Clear] or {Clear/Stop} key and en-  
ter the new ratio.  
C Press the [Vertical] key.  
D Enter the desired ratio with the number keys, followed by the [  
#] key.  
E Press the [OK] key.  
D Press the [OK] key.  
E Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
103  
Copying  
Directional Size Magnification (inch)  
The suitable reproduction ratios will be automatically selected when you enter  
the horizontal and vertical lengths of the original and copy image you require.  
2
1
3
2
4
CP2M01EE  
1: Horizontal original size  
2: Vertical original size  
3: Horizontal copy size  
4: Vertical copy size  
Preparation  
Specify the vertical and horizontal sizes of the original and those of the copy,  
as shown in the illustration.  
Limitation  
If the calculated ratio is over the maximum or under the minimum ratio, it is  
corrected within the range of the ratio automatically. However, with some ra-  
tios, parts of the image might not be copied or blank margins will appear on  
copies.  
Note  
You can enter sizes within the following ranges:  
Metric version  
Inch version  
1 – 999mm (in 1mm steps)  
0.1" – 99.9" (in 0.1" steps)  
The following ratios can be selected:  
• Metric version: 25 – 400%  
• Inch version: 25 – 400%  
104  
   
Directional Size Magnification (inch)  
A Press the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.  
2
B Press the [Size Mag.] key.  
C Press the [D. Size Mag.(inch)] key.  
D Enter the horizontal size of the original with the number keys, then press  
the [  
] key.  
#
Note  
To change the value entered, press the [Clear] or {Clear/Stop} key and enter  
the new value.  
E Enter the horizontal size of the copy with the number keys, then press the  
[
#] key.  
F Enter the vertical size of the original with the number keys, then press the  
] key.  
[
#
G Enter the vertical size of the copy with the number keys, then press the [  
#]  
key.  
105  
Copying  
Note  
To change the length, press the place you wish to change and enter the new  
value.  
H Press the [OK] key.  
I Press the [OK] key.  
J Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
2
106  
Duplex/Combine  
Duplex/Combine  
You can make copies in a variety of formats by combining the following modes:  
• 1 Sided/2 Sided originals  
• 1 Sided/2 Sided copies  
• Duplex  
2
• Combine  
• Book  
• Series  
A Check your originals and select [1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for the originals.  
1
2
ZBQS100N  
1: 1-sided  
2: 2-sided  
3: Book  
B Select [1 Sided] or [2 Sided] for copying.  
107  
   
Copying  
1
2
2
1
3
2
4
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
2
1
2
1
3
2
4
5
7
6
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
4
3
8
9
10 11 12  
13 14 15 16  
ZBQS110E  
1: 1-sided  
2: 2-sided  
A: Front  
B: Back  
C Press the [OK] key.  
108  
Duplex/Combine  
Original Direction and Completed Copies  
The resulting copy image will differ according to the direction in which you set  
your original (lengthwise K or widthwise L).  
2
GCRYOU1E  
Note  
The illustrations show the directions of copied images on the front and back,  
not the directions of delivery.  
Originals and Copy Direction  
You can select the orientation ([Top to Top], [Top to Bottom]). See P.110 “Speci-  
fying Orientation of Bound Originals”.  
• Top to Top  
Duplex1  
• Top to Bottom  
Duplex2  
109  
   
Copying  
Specifying Orientation of Bound Originals  
You can specify the orientation of bound originals (how you turn the pages). The  
default setting is [Top to Top].  
Note  
You can change the orientation default with the User Tools. See “Copy Orien-  
tation in Duplex Mode” and “Original Orientation in Duplex Mode” in ⇒  
P.313 “General Features 2/3.  
2
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
B Press the [Orientation] key.  
C Select an original orientation and a copy orientation.  
D Press the [OK] key.  
110  
   
Duplex  
Duplex  
This function can be used in two ways:  
1 Sided  
2 Sided  
This mode makes two-sided copies from one-sided originals.  
2 Sided  
2 Sided  
2
This mode makes two-sided copies from two-sided originals.  
Limitation  
You cannot use the following copy paper in this function:  
• Paper smaller than A5K, 51/2" × 81/2"K (possible on A5L, 51/2" × 81/  
2"L)  
• Paper thicker than 105g/m2, 28 lb. Bond  
• Paper thinner than 64g/m2, 17 lb. Bond  
• Translucent paper  
• Adhesive labels  
• OHP transparencies  
• Postcards  
You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.  
1 Sided  
2 Sided  
1
2
1
2
Note  
If you set an odd number of 1-sided originals in the document feeder, the re-  
verse side of the last page is left blank.  
If you set originals in the document feeder and select Sort mode, all the orig-  
inals will be scanned before being copied. Therefore, the copy speed is faster  
than that when Sort mode is not selected. See “Auto Sort Mode” in P.329  
“Input/Output”.  
111  
     
Copying  
When original images are copied, the images are shifted by a width of the  
binding margin. You can adjust the binding margin or binding position. You  
can also change their default values. See “Front Margin: Left/Right”, “Back  
Margin: Left/Right”, “Front Margin: Top/Bottom” and “Back Margin: Top/  
Bottom” in P.317 “Page Format 1/2.  
A binding margin can be automatically made on the back side. See “1 2 Du-  
plex Auto Margin Adjust” in P.317 “Page Format 1/2.  
2
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
B Press the [1 Sided] key for original, then press the [2 Sided] key for copy.  
Note  
To change the copy orientation to “Top to Bottom”, press the [Orientation  
]
key and select [Top to Bottom]. See P.110 “Specifying Orientation of Bound  
Originals”.  
C Press the [OK] key.  
D Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
When setting an original on the exposure glass or in the document feeder  
using Batch (SADF) mode  
Reference  
P.36 “Batch (SADF) mode”.  
A Set the original, then press the {Start} key.  
Note  
Start with the first page to be copied.  
112  
Duplex  
B Set the next original. When it is placed on the exposure glass, press the  
{Start} key.  
C Press the {#} key after the last original has been scanned.  
2 Sided  
2 Sided  
2
1
1
2
2
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
B Press the [2 Sided] key for original, then press the [2 Sided] key for copy.  
Note  
To change the copy orientation to “Top to Bottom”, press the [Orientation  
]
key and select [Top to Bottom]. See P.110 “Specifying Orientation of Bound  
Originals”.  
C Press the [OK] key.  
D Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
113  
 
Copying  
When setting an original on the exposure glass or in the document feeder  
using Batch (SADF) mode  
Reference  
P.36 “Batch (SADF) mode”.  
A Set the original, then press the {Start} key.  
2
Note  
Start with the first page to be copied.  
B Set the next original. When it is placed on the exposure glass, press the  
{Start} key.  
C Press the {#} key after the last original has been scanned.  
114  
Combine  
Combine  
You can combine two or more originals into one copy. 1 Sided Combine mode is  
for 1-sided copies, and 2 Sided Combine mode for 2-sided copies.  
This function can be used in twelve ways:  
1 Sided 2 Pages  
Copies two 1-sided originals to one side of a sheet.  
Combine 1 Side  
2
1 Sided 4 Pages  
Combine 1 Side  
Copies four 1-sided originals together to one side of a sheet.  
1 Sided 8 Pages  
Combine 1 Side  
Copies eight 1-sided originals together to one side of a sheet.  
1 Sided 4 Pages  
Combine 2 Side  
Copies four 1-sided originals to the two-page spread on both sides of a sheet.  
1 Sided 8 Pages  
Combine 2 Side  
Copies eight 1-sided originals together to both sides of a sheet.  
1 Sided 16 Pages  
Copies 16 1-sided originals together to both sides of a sheet.  
Combine 2 Side  
2 Sided 2 Pages  
Copies one 2-sided original to one side of a sheet.  
Combine 1 Side  
2 Sided 4 Pages  
Copies two 2-sided originals to one side of a sheet.  
Combine 1 Side  
2 Sided 8 Pages  
Copies four 2-sided originals to one side of a sheet.  
Combine 1 Side  
2 Sided 4 Pages  
Combine 2 Side  
Copies two 2-sided originals together to both sides of a sheet.  
2 Sided 8 Pages  
Combine 2 Side  
Copies four 2-sided originals together to both sides of a sheet.  
2 Sided 16 Pages  
Copies eight 2-sided originals together to both sides of a sheet.  
Combine 2 Side  
Limitation  
You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.  
If the calculated ratio is under the minimum ratio, it is corrected within the  
range of the ratio automatically. However, with some ratios, parts of the im-  
age might not be copied.  
115  
   
Copying  
Note  
In this mode, the machine selects the reproduction ratio automatically. This  
reproduction ratio depends on the copy paper sizes and the number of origi-  
nals.  
The machine uses ratios in the following range:  
• Metric version: 25 – 400%  
• Inch version: 25 – 400%  
2
A separation line between originals can be printed with the User Tools. See  
“Combine Separation Line” in P.320 “Page Format 2/2.  
Even if the direction of originals is different from that of the copy paper, the  
machine will automatically rotate the image by 90° to make copies properly.  
When making copies in Combine mode, the border of each original can be au-  
tomatically erased by 3mm, 0.1". See “Combine Orig. Shadow Erase” in ⇒  
P.317 “Page Format 1/2.  
If the number of originals placed is less than the number specified for com-  
bining, the last page is copied blank as shown in the illustration.  
1
2
1
3
2
3
You can change the copy order in Combination mode. See “Copy Order In  
Combine Mode” in P.320 “Page Format 2/2.  
Direction of the originals and arrangement of combined images  
Portrait ( ) originals  
K
1
2
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
2
8
GCSHUY1E  
Landscape (  
L
) originals  
1
2
1
2
4
6
8
1
2
3
5
7
8
GCSHUY2E  
116  
Combine  
1 Sided 2 Pages  
Combine 1 Side  
Copies two 1-sided originals to one side of a sheet.  
2
1
2
1
2
GC SHVY 7J  
Setting originals (Originals set in the document feeder)  
• Originals read from left to right  
1
2
1
2
3
3
4
4
Combine5  
• Originals read from top to bottom  
1
2
2
1
3
4
3
4
Combine6  
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
117  
 
Copying  
B Press the [1 Sided] key for the original, then press the [Combine 1 Side] key for  
the copy.  
2
C Press the [2 Originals] key, then press the [OK] key.  
D Select the paper.  
E Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
118  
Combine  
1 Sided 4 Pages  
Combine 1 Side  
Copies four 1-sided originals together to one side of a sheet.  
1
2
3
1 2  
2
4
3 4  
GC SHVY 8J  
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
B Press the [1 Sided] key for the original, then press the [Combine 1 Side] key for  
the copy.  
C Press the [4 Originals] key, then press the [OK] key.  
119  
 
Copying  
D Select the paper.  
2
E Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
1 Sided 8 Pages  
Combine 1 Side  
Copies eight 1-sided originals together to one side of a sheet.  
1
2
1 2 3 4  
7
5 6 7 8  
8
GC SHVY 3J  
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
120  
 
Combine  
B Press the [1 Sided] key for the original, then press the [Combine 1 Side] key for  
the copy.  
2
C Press the [8 Originals] key, then press the [OK] key.  
D Select the paper.  
E Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
121  
Copying  
1 Sided 4 Pages  
Combine 2 Side  
Copies four 1-sided originals to the two-page spread on both sides of a sheet.  
1
2
1
2
3
2
4
4
3
GC SHVY 9J  
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
B Press the [1 Sided] key for the original, then press the [Combine 2 Side] key for  
the copy.  
C Press the [4 Originals] key, then press the [OK] key.  
122  
 
Combine  
D Check the orientation.  
2
Note  
To change the copy orientation to “Top to Bottom”, press the [Orientation  
]
key and select [Top to Bottom]. See P.110 “Specifying Orientation of Bound  
Originals”.  
E Press the [OK] key.  
F Select the paper.  
G Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
1 Sided 8 Pages  
Combine 2 Side  
Copies eight 1-sided originals together to both sides of a sheet.  
1
2
1 2  
5 6  
7
3 4  
7 8  
8
1
2
GCSHVYAE  
1. Front  
2. Back  
123  
 
Copying  
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
2
B Press the [1 Sided] key for the original, then press the [Combine 2 Side] key for  
the copy.  
C Press the [8 Originals] key, then press the [OK] key.  
D Check the orientation.  
124  
Combine  
Note  
To change the copy orientation to “Top to Bottom”, press the [Orientation  
]
key and select [Top to Bottom]. See P.110 “Specifying Orientation of Bound  
Originals”.  
E Press the [OK] key.  
F Select the paper.  
2
G Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
1 Sided 16 Pages  
Combine 2 Side  
Copies sixteen 1-sided originals together to both sides of a sheet.  
1
1 2 3 4  
2
5 6 7 8  
1
15  
16  
9 10 11 12  
13 14 15 16  
2
GCSHVY5E  
1. Front  
2. Back  
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
125  
 
Copying  
B Press the [1 Sided] key for the original, then press the [Combine 2 Side] key for  
the copy.  
2
C Press the [16 Originals] key, then press the [OK] key.  
D Check the orientation.  
Note  
To change the copy orientation to “Top to Bottom”, press the [Orientation  
]
key and select [Top to Bottom]. See P.110 “Specifying Orientation of Bound  
Originals”.  
E Press the [OK] key.  
F Select the paper.  
G Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
126  
Combine  
2 Sided 2 Pages  
Combine 1 Side  
Copies one 2-sided original to one side of a sheet.  
1
2
1
2
2
GC SHVY OJ  
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
B Press the [2 Sided] key for the original, then press the [Combine 1 Side] key for  
the copy.  
C Press the [2 Pages] key, then press the [OK] key.  
127  
 
Copying  
D Check the orientation.  
2
Note  
To change the copy orientation to “Top to Bottom”, press the [Orientation  
]
key and select [Top to Bottom]. See P.110 “Specifying Orientation of Bound  
Originals”.  
E Press the [OK] key.  
F Select the paper.  
G Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
2 Sided 4 Pages  
Combine 1 Side  
Copies two 2-sided originals to one side of a sheet.  
1
3
1 2  
2
3 4  
4
GC SHVY BJ  
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
128  
 
Combine  
B Press the [2 Sided] key for the original, then press the [Combine 1 Side] key for  
the copy.  
2
C Press the [4 Pages] key, then press the [OK] key.  
D Check the orientation.  
Note  
To change the copy orientation to “Top to Bottom”, press the [Orientation  
]
key and select [Top to Bottom]. See P.110 “Specifying Orientation of Bound  
Originals”.  
E Press the [OK] key.  
F Select the paper.  
G Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
129  
Copying  
2 Sided 8 Pages  
Combine 1 Side  
Copies four 2-sided originals to one side of a sheet.  
1
3
1 2 3 4  
2
5
2
7
5 6 7 8  
4
6
8
GC SHVY 4J  
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
B Press the [2 Sided] key for the original, then press the [Combine 1 Side] key for  
the copy.  
C Press the [8 Pages] key, then press the [OK] key.  
130  
 
Combine  
D Check the orientation.  
2
Note  
To change the copy orientation to “Top to Bottom”, press the [Orientation  
]
key and select [Top to Bottom]. See P.110 “Specifying Orientation of Bound  
Originals”.  
E Press the [OK] key.  
F Select the paper.  
G Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
2 Sided 4 Pages  
Combine 2 Side  
Copies 2-sided originals together to both sides of a sheet.  
1
1
2
3
2
4
3
4
GC SHVY 1J  
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
131  
 
Copying  
B Press the [2 Sided] key for the original, then press the [Combine 2 Side] key for  
the copy.  
2
C Press the [4 Pages] key, then press the [OK] key.  
D Check the orientation.  
Note  
To change the copy orientation to “Top to Bottom”, press the [Orientation  
]
key and select [Top to Bottom]. See P.110 “Specifying Orientation of Bound  
Originals”.  
E Press the [OK] key  
F Select the paper.  
G Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
132  
Combine  
2 Sided 8 Pages  
Combine 2 Side  
Copies four 2-sided originals together to both sides of a sheet.  
1
3
2
1 2  
5 6  
5
2
7
3 4  
1
7 8  
2
4
6
8
GCSHVY2E  
1. Front  
2. Back  
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
B Press the [2 Sided] key for the original, then press the [Combine 2 Side] key for  
the copy.  
133  
 
Copying  
C Press the [8 Pages] key, then press the [OK] key.  
2
D Check the orientation.  
Note  
To change the copy orientation to “Top to Bottom”, press the [Orientation  
]
key and select [Top to Bottom]. See P.110 “Specifying Orientation of Bound  
Originals”.  
E Press the [OK] key  
F Select the paper.  
G Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
134  
Combine  
2 Sided 16 Pages  
Combine 2 Side  
Copies eight 2-sided originals together to both sides of a sheet.  
1
1 2 3 4  
3
2
2
5 6 7 8  
4
1
13  
15  
9 10 11 12  
14  
13 14 15 16  
16  
2
GCSHVY6E  
1. Front  
2. Back  
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
B Press the [2 Sided] key for the original, then press the [Combine 2 Side] key for  
the copy.  
135  
 
Copying  
C Press the [16 Pages] key, then press the [OK] key.  
2
D Check the orientation.  
Note  
To change the copy orientation to “Top to Bottom”, press the [Orientation  
]
key and select [Top to Bottom]. See P.110 “Specifying Orientation of Bound  
Originals”.  
E Press the [OK] key.  
F Select the paper.  
G Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
136  
Series/Book  
Series/Book  
Series copies are made by separately copying the front and back of a 2-sided  
original or the two facing pages of a spread original onto two sheets of paper. A  
book is made by copying two or more originals in page order.  
The following types of Series and Book modes can be used:  
Series Copies  
2
Book  
1 Sided  
Copies the two facing pages of a spread original to make two 1-sided copies.  
2 Sided  
1 Sided  
Copies the front and back of a 2-sided original to make two 1-sided copies.  
Book  
Book  
2 Sided  
Copies a spread two-page original onto both sides of a sheet.  
Multi  
2 Sided  
Copies each spread two-page original as it is onto both sides of a sheet.  
Booklet  
Make copies in page order for a folded booklet.  
Magazine  
Copies two or more originals to make copies in page order (as when they are  
folded and stacked).  
137  
   
Copying  
Series Copies  
Book  
1 Sided  
You can make one-sided copies from two facing pages of a bound original  
(book).  
2
1
2
1
2
Note  
See the following table when you select original and copy paper sizes with  
100% ratio:  
Metric version  
Original  
A3L  
Copy paper  
A4K × 2 sheets  
B5K × 2 sheets  
A5K × 2 sheets  
B4L  
A4L  
Inch version  
Original  
Copy paper  
81/2" × 11"K × 2 sheets  
51/2" × 81/2"K × 2 sheets  
11" × 17"L  
81/2" × 11"L  
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
138  
   
Series/Book  
B Press the [Book] key.  
2
C Press the [Book  
1 Sided] key.  
D Press the [OK] key.  
E Press the [OK] key.  
F Make sure that the [Auto Paper Select] key is selected.  
Note  
If the [Auto Paper Select] key is not selected, press the [Auto Paper Select] key.  
G Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
2 Sided  
1 Sided  
You can make one-sided copies from two-sided originals.  
1
1
2
2
139  
Copying  
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
2
B Press the [2 Sided] key for the original, then press the [1 Sided] key for the  
copy.  
C Check the orientation.  
Note  
To change the original orientation to “Top to Bottom”, press the [Orienta-  
tion] key, then select [Top to Bottom]. See P.110 “Specifying Orientation of  
Bound Originals”.  
D Press the [OK] key  
E Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
Copying Book Originals  
Limitation  
You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.  
The machine cannot copy originals different in size and direction.  
Note  
The machine sets the reproduction ratio automatically to meet the paper size  
and copies the originals together onto the paper.  
The machine uses ratios in the range of 25 to 400%.  
140  
   
Series/Book  
If the calculated ratio is under the available minimum ratio, it will be adjusted  
to the minimum ratio. However, with some ratios, parts of the image might  
not be copied.  
Even if the direction of originals is different from that of the copy paper, the  
machine will automatically rotate the image by 90° to make copies properly.  
Book→  
2 Sided  
2
Copies a two-page spread original onto both sides of a sheet.  
1
2
1
2
Note  
See the following table when you select original and copy paper sizes with  
100% ratio:  
Metric version  
Original  
A3L  
Copy paper  
A4 (2-sided)  
B5 (2-sided)  
A5 (2-sided)  
B4L  
A4L  
Inch version  
Original  
Copy paper  
81/2" × 11" (2-sided)  
51/2" × 81/2" (2-sided)  
11" × 17"L  
81/2" × 11"L  
141  
Copying  
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
2
B Press the [Book] key.  
C Press the [Book  
2 Sided] key.  
D Press the [Book  
2 Sided] key.  
E Press the [OK] key.  
F Select the paper.  
G Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
142  
Series/Book  
Multi  
2 Sided  
Copies each two-page spread original as it is onto both sides of a sheet.  
1
2
1
2
2
3
3
Note  
See the following table when you select original and copy paper sizes with  
100% ratio:  
Metric version  
Original  
A3L  
Copy paper  
A4 (2-sided)  
B5 (2-sided)  
A5 (2-sided)  
B4L  
A4L  
Inch version  
Original  
Copy paper  
81/2" × 11" (2-sided)  
51/2" × 81/2" (2-sided)  
11" × 17"L  
81/2" × 11"L  
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
143  
Copying  
B Press the [Book] key.  
2
C Press the [Book  
2 Sided] key.  
D Press the [Multi  
2 Sided] key.  
E Press the [OK] key.  
F Select the paper.  
G Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
Note  
When placing one original on the exposure glass or in the document feeder  
in Batch (SADF) mode, press the {#} key after all originals are scanned.  
144  
Series/Book  
Booklet  
Make copies in page order for a folded booklet as shown in the following illus-  
trations:  
Portrait  
2
1
2
3
2
3
4
1
4
GCBOOK0E  
Landscape  
1
2
3
3
2
4
4
1
GCBOOK1E  
Important  
Before selecting this function, select “Portrait” or “Landscape” with the User  
Tools. See “Booklet/Magazine Original Orientation” in P.320 “Page Format 2/  
2.  
Note  
Four originals are copied onto each sheet of copy paper.  
In this mode, the machine sets the reproduction ratio automatically to meet  
the paper size and copies the originals together onto the paper.  
A ratio is selected in the range of 25 to 400%.  
If the calculated ratio is under the available minimum ratio, it will be adjusted  
to the minimum ratio. However, with some ratios, parts of the image might  
not be copied.  
If the number of originals scanned is less than a multiple of 4, the last page is  
copied blank.  
You can have a 3mm, 0.1" bounding margin around all four edges of the orig-  
inal left blank (erased). See “Combine Orig. Shadow Erase” in P.317 “Page  
Format 1/2.  
145  
Copying  
How to fold copies to make a booklet  
1
2
3
3
1
1
2
GCBOOK2E  
1. Portrait  
2. Landscape  
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
B Press the [Book] key.  
146  
Series/Book  
C Press the [Booklet] key, followed by the [OK] key.  
2
D Select the paper.  
E Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
Note  
When placing one original on the exposure glass or in the document feeder  
in Batch (SADF) mode, press the {#} key after all originals are scanned.  
Magazine  
Copies two or more originals to make copies in page order when they are folded  
and stacked.  
Portrait  
1
2
2
7
4
5
7
1
8
3
6
8
GCBOOK3E  
147  
 
Copying  
Landscape  
1
2
7
2
5
4
7
8
1
6
3
8
2
GCBOOK4E  
Important  
Before selecting this function, select “Portrait” or “Landscape” with the User  
Tools. See “Booklet/Magazine Original Orientation” in P.320 “Page Format  
2/2.  
Note  
To use this function with two-sided originals, select this function from the  
Shortcut Keys. See “Shortcut Keys” in P.314 “General Features 3/3.  
Four originals are copied onto each sheet of copy paper.  
In this mode, the machine sets the reproduction ratio automatically to meet  
the paper size and copies the originals together onto the paper.  
A ratio is selected in the range of 25 to 400%.  
If the calculated ratio is under the available minimum ratio, it will be adjusted  
to the minimum ratio. However, with some ratios, parts of the image might  
not be copied.  
If the number of originals scanned is less than a multiple of 4, the last page is  
copied blank.  
You can have a 3mm bounding margin around all four edges of the original  
left blank (erased). See “Combine Orig. Shadow Erase” in P.317 “Page For-  
mat 1/2.  
The copying may take some time after scanning originals.  
148  
Series/Book  
How to fold and unfold copies to make a magazine  
Portrait  
7
5
5
2
1
3
1
3
GCBOOK5E  
Landscape  
5
3
7
5
1
1
3
GCBOOK6E  
Note  
If you select “Saddle Stitch” with the optional booklet finisher in Magazine  
mode, the machine staples the paper, and folds it like a book, then delivers  
the folded pages.  
Limitation  
If you select “Saddle Stitch” with the optional booklet finisher in Magazine  
mode when the number of originals is only one, the original image is copied  
onto the second page of the copy paper.  
A Press the [Duplex/Combine] key.  
149  
Copying  
B Press the [Book] key.  
2
C Press the [Magazine] key, followed by the [OK] key.  
D Select the paper.  
E Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
Note  
When placing one original on the exposure glass or in the document feeder  
in Batch (SADF) mode, press the {#} key after all originals are scanned.  
150  
Cover/Slip Sheet  
Cover/Slip Sheet  
Using this function, you can add or insert cover or paper designate.  
There are four types in this function:  
Front Cover  
The first page of your originals is copied on a specific paper sheet for covers.  
2
Front/Back Covers  
The first and last pages of your originals are copied on specific paper sheets  
for covers.  
Paper Designate  
Use this function to have certain pages of your original copied onto slip  
sheets.  
Chapters  
If you specify the first page of each chapter with this function, those pages  
will always appear on the front of copies when using 1 sided 2 sided mode.  
Preparation  
Before selecting this function, set the tray for front cover paper and slip sheet  
paper. See “Cover”, “Slip Sheet 1” and “Slip Sheet 2” in the System Settings  
manual.  
The cover or slip sheets should be identical in size and direction with the copy  
paper.  
Limitation  
You cannot set the copy paper in the bypass tray. Only set the cover or slip  
sheets in the bypass tray.  
Note  
If Blank mode is selected, the cover will not be counted as a copy.  
Front Cover  
The first page of your originals is copied on specific paper sheet for covers, or a  
cover sheet is inserted before the first copy.  
151  
       
Copying  
Copy  
3
3
2
2
1
1
2
Blank  
3
3
2
2
1
1
Note  
You can specify whether to make a copy on a sheet for covers. If you select  
[
Copy], the first page will be copied on the cover sheet. If you select [Blank], a  
cover sheet will just be inserted before the first copy.  
When choosing [Copy], select whether the front and back covers are copied  
single-sided (“1 Sided Only”) or double-sided (“Duplex Copy”). See “Cover”  
in the System Settings manual.  
In “Cover” of the User Tools (System Settings), if you selected “Mode Select-  
ed” for “Tray Display” setting, the machine refers to the settings in “Cover”  
about whether the front and back covers are copied single-sided (“1 Sided  
Only”) or double-sided (“Duplex Copy”). If you selected “Display Always”  
for “Tray Display”, the machine refers to the settings in “Special Paper Indi-  
cation” about whether the front and back covers are copied single-sided (“1  
Sided Copy”) or double-sided (“Duplex Copy”). See “Special Paper Indica-  
tion” and “Cover” in the System Settings manual.  
When you use this function with Combine mode, you can specify whether to  
combine the front cover or not. See “Cover page in combine mode” in P.320  
“Page Format 2/2.  
A Press the [Cover/Slip Sheet] key.  
152  
Cover/Slip Sheet  
B Press the [Front Cover] key.  
2
C Select [Copy] or [Blank] for a cover sheet, and then press the [OK] key.  
D Select the paper tray containing the non-cover sheet paper.  
E Set your originals in the document feeder, then press the {Start} key.  
153  
Copying  
Front/Back Covers  
The first and last pages of your originals are copied on specific paper sheets for  
covers.  
Copy  
2
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
GCCOVE0E  
Blank  
3
3
2
2
1
1
Note  
You can specify whether to make a copy on a cover sheet. If you select [Copy],  
the first and last pages will be copied on the cover sheets. If you select [Blank],  
a cover sheet will just be inserted before the first copy and another sheet after  
the last copy.  
When choosing [Copy], select whether the front and back covers are copied  
single-sided (“1 Sided Only”) or double-sided (“Duplex Copy”). See “Cover”  
in the System Settings manual.  
In “Cover” of the User Tools (System Settings), if you selected “Mode Select-  
ed” for “Tray Display” setting, the machine refers to the settings in “Cover”  
about whether the front and back covers are copied single-sided (“1 Sided  
Only”) or double-sided (“Duplex Copy”). If you selected “Display Always”  
for “Tray Display”, the machine refers to the settings in “Special Paper Indi-  
cation” about whether the front and back covers are copied single-sided (“1  
Sided Copy”) or double-sided (“Duplex Copy”). See “Special Paper Indica-  
tion” and “Cover” in the System Settings manual.  
When making a 1-sided cover copy, you can specify whether to issue the back  
cover outside (outside page) or inside (inside page). See “Copy Back Cover”  
in P.320 “Page Format 2/2.  
154  
   
Cover/Slip Sheet  
A Press the [Cover/Slip Sheet] key.  
2
B Press the [F/ B Cover] key.  
C Select [Copy] or [Blank] for the cover sheets, and then press the [OK] key.  
D Select the paper tray containing the non-cover sheet paper.  
E Set your originals in the document feeder, then press the {Start} key.  
155  
Copying  
Designate  
Use this function to have certain pages of your original copied onto slip sheets.  
2
10  
10  
5
5
1
1
Preparation  
Before using this function, set the special paper tray for slip sheets. See “Slip  
Sheet 1”, “Slip Sheet 2” in the System Settings manual.  
Limitation  
You cannot use this function with Slip Sheet mode.  
Note  
You can specify the pages up to 20.  
When Combine mode (“1 Sided 2 Sided”) has been selected, the page num-  
bers you designate will always be copied onto the front of copies in the same  
way as Chapters mode.  
A Press the [Cover/Slip Sheet] key.  
156  
   
Cover/Slip Sheet  
B Press the [Designate/Chapter] key.  
2
C Press the key to select the chapter number.  
D Enter the page number of the original's location you want to copy onto a  
slip sheet with the number keys. Then, press the {#} key.  
Note  
To change the value entered, press the [Clear] or {Clear/Stop} key and enter  
the new value.  
E Select [Copy] or [Blank] for a slip sheet.  
F Select the paper tray for slip sheets.  
G Press the [OK] key.  
Note  
To display the settings for the next chapter, press the [To next chapter] key.  
H To specify another page location, repeat steps C to G.  
157  
Copying  
Note  
To select chapters 11 to 20, press the [T11-20] key.  
I When you wish to finish specifying page location, press the [OK] key.  
2
This display shows example settings.  
Note  
To change the number entered, enter the new number in the same way as  
steps C to G.  
J Select the paper tray containing the non-slip sheet paper.  
K Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
Chapters  
The page locations you specify with this function will appear on the front of  
copy sheets.  
6
4
4
3
1
1
5
2
GC SHOW OJ  
158  
   
Cover/Slip Sheet  
Preparation  
Before selecting this function, press the [Duplex/Combine] key and select Du-  
plex (1 Sided 2 Sided) mode or Combine mode.  
Limitation  
You cannot use this function with Slip Sheet mode.  
Note  
2
You can specify the pages up to 20.  
This function can be used only when you use the Duplex (1 Sided2 Sided)  
or Combine function.  
This function can be combined with the Designate function.  
A Press the [Cover/Slip Sheet] key.  
B Press the [Designate/Chapter] key.  
C Press the key to select the chapter number.  
Note  
To select chapters 11 to 20, press the [T11-20] key.  
159  
Copying  
D Press the [Chapters] key.  
2
E Enter the page location of the first page of the first chapter with the number  
keys. Then, press the {#} key.  
Note  
To change the value entered, press the [Clear] or {Clear/Stop} key and enter  
the new value.  
F Press the [OK] key.  
Note  
To display the settings for the next chapter, press the [To next chapter] key  
before pressing the [OK] key.  
G To specify another page location, repeat steps C to F.  
Note  
To select chapters 11 to 20, press the [T11-20] key.  
H When you finish specifying the page location, press the [OK] key.  
This display shows example settings.  
160  
Cover/Slip Sheet  
Note  
To change the number entered, enter the new number in the same way as  
in steps C to F.  
I Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
2
161  
Copying  
Slip Sheets  
Every time the original's page changes, a slip sheet is inserted. This function can  
be used to insert a slip sheet automatically between each OHP transparency cop-  
ied or used as a stack function. You can also copy onto the inserted slip sheets.  
2
1
2
1
2
3
3
Preparation  
Before selecting this function, specify the paper tray for slip sheets. See “Slip  
Sheet 1”, “Slip Sheet 2” in the System Settings manual.  
Limitation  
You cannot use this function with Chapters and Paper Designate modes.  
In Connect Copy mode, you cannot use the non-standard size paper.  
Note  
Set the slip sheets in the same orientation as originals.  
You can specify whether to make copies onto the inserted slip sheets or not.  
If you do not copy onto slip sheets, they are excluded from the number of cop-  
ies counted.  
In Connect Copy mode, specify the paper settings before you press the [Con-  
nect] key.  
When using OHP transparencies set on the bypass tray  
Blank  
2
1
1
2
162  
   
Slip Sheets  
Limitation  
When copying two or more originals using the bypass tray, the copies are de-  
Note  
Press the {#} key and set the “Special Paper” setting to [OHP]. See P.76  
“When Copying onto OHP Transparencies or Thick Paper”.  
When you select [OHP], copy paper is delivered face up even if you have set  
the “Face-Up/Down Selection in Bypass Mode” setting to “Face Down Exit”.  
See “Face-Up/Down Selection in Bypass Mode” in P.331 “Count Manager”.  
2
A Press the [Cover/Slip Sheet] key.  
B Press the [Slip Sheet] key.  
C Select [Copy] or [Blank], followed by the [OK] key.  
163  
Copying  
D Select the paper tray containing the non-slip sheet paper.  
When using OHP transparencies, open the bypass tray.  
2
E Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
164  
Double Copies  
Double Copies  
One original image is copied twice on one copy as shown in the illustration.  
2
Limitation  
The following originals cannot be detected properly on the exposure glass. Be  
sure to select the copy paper manually or set the originals in the document  
feeder.  
Metric version  
Inch version  
A5L, B6KL  
51/2" × 81/2"L  
You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.  
Note  
You can insert separation lines between repeated images. See “Double Copies  
Separation Line” in P.320 “Page Format 2/2.  
See the following table when you select original and copy paper sizes with  
100% ratio:  
Metric version  
Original Size and Direction  
Copy Paper Size and Direction  
A5L  
B6L  
A4K  
A5K  
B6K  
A4K  
B5K  
A3L  
A4L  
B5L  
165  
   
Copying  
Inch version  
Original Size and Direction  
Copy Paper Size and Direction  
51/2" × 81/2"L  
51/2" × 81/2"K  
81/2" × 11"K  
81/2" × 11"K  
81/2" × 11"L  
11" × 17"L  
2
A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.  
B Press the [Double] key.  
C Press the [OK] key.  
D Select the paper.  
E Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
166  
Image Repeat  
Image Repeat  
The original image is copied repeatedly.  
2
Note  
The number of repeated images depends on the original size, copy paper size,  
and reproduction ratio. See the following table:  
Original: A5  
K
/Copy paper: A4  
K
or Original: A5  
/Copy paper A4  
L L  
4 repeats (71%)  
16 repeats (35%)  
Repeat2  
Repeat1  
Original: A5  
K
/Copy paper: A4  
L
or Original: A5  
/Copy paper A4  
L K  
2 repeats (100%)  
8 repeats (50%)  
Repeat3  
Repeat4  
Part of a repeated image might not be copied depending on copy paper size,  
You can insert separation lines between repeated images. See “Repeat Sepa-  
ration Line” in P.317 “Page Format 1/2.  
You can select the area of the images to be repeated. See P.169 “To repeat the  
image of the selected area”.  
A Select the size of the copy paper and the reproduction ratio.  
167  
   
Copying  
B Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.  
2
C Press the [Repeat] key.  
D Specify the area to be repeated.  
To repeat the whole image of the original  
A Press the [All area] key.  
168  
Image Repeat  
To repeat the image of the selected area  
A Press the [Selected area] key.  
2
B Enter the horizontal size of the area with the number keys, then press the  
[
#
] key.  
Note  
To change the number entered, press the [Clear] or {Clear/Stop} key and  
enter the new number.  
C Enter the vertical size of the area with the number keys, then press the  
[
#
] key.  
Note  
To change the number entered, press the [Clear] or {Clear/Stop} key and  
enter the new number.  
E Press the [OK] key.  
F Press the [OK] key.  
G Set your original, then press the {Start} key.  
169  
 
Copying  
Margin Adjustment  
You can shift the image left, right, top or bottom to make a binding margin.  
A
A
2
Limitation  
If you set the margin too wide, areas you do not want to delete might be  
erased.  
Note  
You can change the width of the binding margin as follows:  
Metric version  
0 – 30mm (in 1mm steps)  
The margin width default is as follows. You can change this default setting  
with the User Tools. See “Front Margin: Left/Right”, “Back Margin: Left/  
Right”, “Front Margin: Top/Bottom”, “Back Margin: Top/Bottom” in ⇒  
P.317 “Page Format 1/2.  
Metric version  
• Front: 5mm Left  
• Back: 5mm Right  
Inch version  
• Front: 0.2" Left  
• Back: 0.2" Right  
When making two-sided copies from one-sided originals, you can set a bind-  
ing margin for back pages. See “1 2 Duplex Auto Margin Adjust” in ⇒  
P.317 “Page Format 1/2.  
When making copies in Combine mode, the binding margins are made on the  
copies after the combining is finished.  
When “2 Sided 1 Sided” is selected, set the binding margins for front and  
back pages of the original.  
170  
   
Margin Adjustment  
A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.  
2
B Press the [Margin Adj.] key.  
C Set a binding margin for a front page. Press the [] and [] keys when set-  
ting the left and right margins, and the [] and [] keys when setting the  
top and bottom margins.  
Note  
To change the value entered, press the [], [], [], [] keys and enter the  
new value.  
D Set a binding margin for back pages. Press the [] and [] keys when set-  
ting the left and right margins, and the [] and [] keys when setting the  
top and bottom margins.  
Note  
You can specify the back margin only when the Duplex or the Two Sided  
copy with Combine is selected.  
If you do not need to specify the back margin, press the [OK] key and go to  
step E.  
E Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
171  
Copying  
Erase  
This function erases the center and/or all four sides of the original image. This  
is useful for avoiding shadows on the copy image caused by the bound originals,  
such as books.  
This function can be used in three ways:  
2
Border  
This mode erases the edge margin of the original image.  
Center  
This mode erases the center margin of the original image.  
Center/Border  
This mode erases both the center and edge margins of the original image.  
Note  
You can change the width of the erased margin as follows:  
Metric version  
Inch version  
3 – 50mm (in 1mm steps)  
0.1" – 2.0" (in 0.1" steps)  
The default setting of the erased margin is as follows. You can change this set-  
tings with the User Tools. See “Erase Border” and “Erase Center” in P.317  
“Page Format 1/2.  
Metric version  
Inch version  
10mm  
0.4"  
The width of the erased margin varies depending on the reproduction ratio.  
If the size of the original is different from sizes listed in the following chart,  
the erased margin might be shifted.  
Metric version  
Where Original Is Set  
Paper Size and Orientation  
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" × 13"L *1  
Exposure glass  
Document feeder  
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6KL,  
11" × 17"L, 11" × 15"L, 82/1" × 11"KL, 81/2" ×  
13"L *1  
*1  
You can select from 81/2" × 13", 81/4" × 13" and 8" × 13" with the User Tools (Sys-  
tem Settings). See “<F/F4>Size Setting” in the System Settings manual.  
172  
     
Erase  
Inch version  
Where Original Is Set  
Paper Size and Orientation  
11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL  
Exposure glass  
A4KL, 11" × 17"L, 11" × 15"L, 81/2" × 14"L,  
Document feeder  
81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL, 81/2" × 13"L  
*1  
2
*1  
You can select from 81/2" × 13", 81/4" × 13" and 8" × 13" with the User Tools (Sys-  
tem Settings). See “<F/F4>Size Setting” in the System Settings manual.  
The relationship between the original orientation and the erased part is as fol-  
lows:  
L original  
K original  
1
0.1"~2.0"  
1
1: Erased part  
Border Erase  
This function erases the edge margins. You can set the same margin width for all  
four sides, or you can set different margin widths for each side.  
Note  
If you want to erase the center margin too, use the Center/Border function.  
See P.177 “Center/Border Erase”.  
173  
     
Copying  
A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.  
2
B Press the [Erase] key.  
C Press the [Border] key.  
D Set the erase border width.  
Selecting [Same Width  
]
A Press the [Same Width] key.  
174  
Erase  
B Set an erase border width with the [n] and [o] keys, followed by the  
[
OK] key.  
Note  
To change the value entered, press the [n] and [o] keys and enter the  
new value.  
Selecting [4 Sides  
]
2
A Press the [4 Sides] key.  
B Press the key for the border you wish to change and set an erase border  
width with the [n] and [o] keys.  
Note  
To change the value entered, press the [n] and [o] keys and enter the  
new value.  
C Press the [OK] key.  
E Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
Center Erase  
This function erases the center margin.  
Note  
If you want to erase the border margin too, use the Center/Border function.  
See P.177 “Center/Border Erase”.  
175  
   
Copying  
A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.  
2
B Press the [Erase] key.  
C Press the [Center] key.  
D Set the erase center width with the [n] and [o] keys. Then press the [OK  
]
key.  
Note  
To change the value entered, press the [n] and [o] keys and enter the new  
value.  
E Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
176  
Erase  
Center/Border Erase  
This mode erases both the center and edge margins. You can set the same margin  
width for all four sides and center, or you can set different margin widths for each.  
2
A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.  
B Press the [Erase] key.  
C Press the [Center/Border] key.  
D Set the erase margin width.  
177  
     
Copying  
Selecting [Same Width  
]
A Press the [Center] key, then set the erase center width with the [n] and  
[o] keys.  
Note  
To change the value entered, press the [n] and [o] keys and enter the  
new value.  
2
B Press the [Same Width] key.  
C Press the [Border] key, then set the erase border width with the [n] and  
[o] keys.  
Note  
To change the value entered, press the [n] and [o] keys and enter the  
new value.  
D Press the [OK] key.  
Selecting [4 Sides  
]
A Press the [4 Sides] key.  
B Press the key for the part you wish to change and set an erase margin  
width with the [n] and [o] keys.  
Note  
To change the value entered, press the [n] and [o] keys and enter the  
new value.  
C Press the [OK] key.  
E Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
178  
Centering  
Centering  
You can make copies by moving the image to the center of the copy paper.  
2
Limitation  
You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.  
If the direction of originals is different from that of the copy paper, the ma-  
chine will not rotate the image by 90°(rotated copy).  
If the original size cannot be measured, the centering function will not work.  
Note  
The original sizes and directions for centering are listed below.  
Metric version  
Original placed on:  
Exposure glass  
Original size and direction  
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" × 13"L *1 , 8KL,  
16KKL  
Document feeder  
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6KL, 11" ×  
17"L, 11" × 15"L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 81/2" × 13"L *1  
*1  
You can select from 81/2" × 13", 81/4" × 13" and 8" × 13" with the User Tools (Sys-  
tem Settings). See ”<F/F4>Size Setting” in the System Settings manual.  
Inch version  
Original placed on:  
Original size and direction  
11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL  
Exposure glass  
A4KL, 11" × 17"L, 11" × 15"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" ×  
Document feeder  
11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL, 81/2" × 13"L *1  
*1  
You can select from 81/2" × 13", 81/4" × 13" and 8" × 13" with the User Tools (Sys-  
tem Settings). See “<F/F4>Size Setting” in the System Settings manual.  
A Select the paper.  
179  
       
Copying  
B Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.  
2
C Press the [Centering] key.  
D Press the [OK] key.  
E Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
180  
Stamp  
Stamp  
This function prints stamp on the copies. Stamp modes are as follows:  
Background Numbering  
This function prints numbers on the background of copies.  
Preset Stamp  
This function prints preset messages on copies.  
2
User Stamp  
This function prints custom messages on copies.  
Date Stamp  
This function prints the date on copies.  
Page Numbering  
This function prints page numbers on copies.  
Background Numbering  
Use this function to have numbers printed on the background of copies.  
This function can help you to keep track of confidential documents.  
GCSTMP2E  
Limitation  
You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.  
Note  
You can change the size of the numbers with the User Tools. See “Size” in ⇒  
P.323 “Background Numbering”.  
You can change the density of the numbers with the User Tools. See “Densi-  
ty” in P.323 “Background Numbering”.  
Numbers are printed on all pages.  
You can select whether the Background Numbering is printed negative if it  
overlaps black parts of image. See “Superimpose” P.323 “Background Num-  
bering”.  
You can change the starting number of the Background Numbering (1 – 999).  
181  
       
Copying  
A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.  
2
B Press the [Stamp] key.  
C Press the [Background Numbering] key.  
D Enter the number to start counting from with the number keys. Then press  
the [OK] key.  
Note  
The number can be set from 1 to 999.  
To change the entered number, press the [Clear] or {Clear/Stop} key and en-  
ter the new number.  
182  
Stamp  
E Press the [OK] key.  
F Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
Preset Stamp  
2
Limitation  
You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.  
One message can be stamped at a time.  
Note  
One of the following eight messages can be stamped on copies with a frame  
around it: “COPY”, “URGENT”, “PRIORITY”, “For Your Info.”, “Prelimi-  
naray”, “For internal use”, “CONFIDENTIAL”, “DRAFT”.  
You can change the print page with the User Tools.  
You can change the size and density of the stamp with the User Tools.  
Depending on the paper size, if you change the stamp size, parts of the stamp  
might not be printed.  
You can choose the default settings for the position, size and density of the  
stamp with the User Tools. See “Stamp position”, “Stamp condition” in ⇒  
P.323 “Preset Stamp”.  
You can choose the default settings for the print page with the User Tools. See  
“Stamp condition” in P.323 “Preset Stamp”.  
You can change the stamp language with the User Tools. See “Stamp Lan-  
guage” in P.323 “Preset Stamp”.  
You can select whether the Preset Stamp is printed negative if it overlaps  
black parts of the image. See “Superimpose” in P.323 “Preset Stamp”.  
You cannot combine the Preset Stamp function with the Image Repeat or  
Double Copies function.  
When you combine this function with the Magazine or Booklet function, only  
the first page is stamped.  
183  
   
Copying  
The relationship between the direction in which you set the original and  
stamp orientation/position is as follows:  
2
GCSTMP5E  
You can change the stamp position to top, bottom, left and right each way in  
1mm, 0.1" steps. See “Stamp position” in P.323 “Preset Stamp”.  
A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.  
B Press the [Stamp] key.  
184  
Stamp  
C Press the [Preset Stamp] key.  
2
D Select the desired message.  
E Press the [All Pages] or [1st Page Only] key to select the print page.  
Limitation  
If you combine this function with the Magazine or Booklet function, “1st  
Page Only” is selected automatically.  
F Change the stamp position, size or density.  
If you do not wish to change, go to step G.  
To change the stamp position, size or density  
A Press the [Change] key.  
185  
Copying  
B Select the desired position, size and density.  
2
C Press the [OK] key.  
G After you specified all the desired settings, press the [OK] key.  
H Press the [OK] key.  
Note  
To cancel the settings, press the [Cancel] key.  
I Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
User Stamp  
Up to four messages which you use frequently can be stored in the machine's  
memory and stamped on copies.  
GCSTMP0E  
Preparation  
Before using this function, you have to store your messages with the User  
Tools. See P.189 “Program/Delete User Stamp”.  
186  
   
Stamp  
Limitation  
You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.  
One message can be stamped at a time.  
In Connect Copy mode, register the same user stamp on the master unit and  
sub-unit.  
If the position exceeds the page boundary, the stamp will not be printed on  
copies.  
Note  
You can change the print page with the User Tools.  
You can choose the default settings for the print page and the stamp position  
with the User Tools. See “Stamp condition” and “Stamp position”in P.325  
“User Stamp”.  
You can combine this function with only one Preset Stamp.  
You cannot combine the User Stamp function with the Image Repeat or Dou-  
ble Copies function.  
The relationship between the direction in which you set the original and  
stamp Orientation/Position is as follows:  
GCSTMP6E  
You can change the stamp position to top, bottom, left and right each way in  
1mm, 0.1" steps. See “Stamp position” in P.325 “User Stamp”.  
187  
Copying  
A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.  
2
B Press the [Stamp] key.  
C Press the [User Stamp] key.  
D Select the stamp you require.  
E Press the [All Pages] or [1st Page Only] key to select the print page.  
188  
Stamp  
To change the stamp position  
A Press the [Change] key.  
B Select the desired position.  
2
C Press the [OK] key.  
F After you specified all the desired settings, press the [OK] key.  
Note  
To cancel the settings, press the [Cancel] key.  
G Press the [OK] key.  
H Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
Program/Delete User Stamp  
A Make sure that the machine is in Copy mode.  
B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Screen  
User Tools/  
Counter  
Contrast  
TSPS040N  
189  
   
Copying  
C Press the [Copy/Document Server Features] key.  
2
D Press the [Stamp Setting] key.  
E Press the [User Stamp] key.  
F Press the [Program/Delete Stamp] key.  
190  
Stamp  
To program the User Stamp  
A Press the [Program] key.  
2
B Press the stamp number (1 – 4) you want to program.  
Note  
Stamp numbers with m already have settings in them.  
If the stamp number is already being used, the machine will ask you if  
you wish to overwrite it — Press the [Yes] or [No] key.  
C Enter the user stamp name with the letter keys on the display panel.  
Note  
You can register up to 8 characters.  
To change the name entered, press the [Back Space], [Clear] or {Clear/  
Stop} key and enter new letters.  
D Press the [OK] key.  
191  
Copying  
E Enter the horizontal size of the stamp with the number keys, then press  
the [  
] key.  
#
2
Note  
To change the value entered, press the [Clear] or {Clear/Stop} key and en-  
ter the new value.  
You can enter sizes within 10 – 432mm, 1.0" – 17.0" horizontal, and 10 –  
297mm, 1.0" – 11.7" vertical. However, if the value exceeds the maxi-  
mum value of the area (5,000mm2, 7.75 inch2), it is corrected within the  
range of the area automatically.  
F Press the [Vertical] key, and enter the vertical size in the same way as step  
E.  
G Set the user stamp on the exposure glass, and then press the [Scan Start  
]
key.  
Note  
Do not set the original in the document feeder.  
The machine scans the original three times. Do not lift the document  
feeder until the main menu of the Copy features appears.  
If you press the [Exit] key, the main menu of the Copy features appears  
with nothing programmed.  
H Press the [Exit] key.  
192  
Stamp  
To delete the User Stamp  
Important  
You cannot restore a deleted stamp.  
A Press the [Delete] key.  
2
B Press the stamp number (1 – 4) you want to delete.  
Note  
Only programs with m contain a user stamp.  
C Press the [Delete] key.  
Note  
To cancel the deletion, press the [Stop] key.  
D Press the [Exit] key.  
E Press the [Exit] key.  
G Press the [Exit] key.  
The initial display appears.  
193  
Copying  
Date Stamp  
2
Limitation  
You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.  
Note  
You can select the following styles:  
• MM/DD/YYYY  
• MM.DD.YYYY  
• DD/MM/YYYY  
• DD.MM.YYYY  
• YYYY.MM.DD  
• DD.JUN.YYYY  
You can change the Date Stamp settings with the User Tools. See P.325  
“Date Stamp”.  
The font and size of the Date Stamp can be changed with the User Tools. See  
“Font” and “Size” in P.325 “Date Stamp”.  
You can select whether the Date Stamp is printed negative if it overlaps black  
parts of an image. See “Superimpose” in P.325 “Date Stamp”.  
For how to set the date, see “Set Date” in the System Settings manual.  
You can choose the default settings for the stamp position with the User  
Tools. See “Position Priority” in P.325 “Date Stamp”.  
The size, font and superimpose settings are linked with the Page Numbering  
functions.  
You cannot combine the Date Stamp function with the Image Repeat or Dou-  
ble Copies function.  
194  
   
Stamp  
The relationship between the direction in which you set the original and the  
stamp position is as follows:  
2
GCSTMP7E  
You can change the stamp position to top, bottom, left and right each way in  
1mm, 0.1" steps. See “Position Priority” in P.325 “Date Stamp”.  
If you combine this function with the Combine, Magazine or Booklet func-  
tion, the page is stamped as follows.  
• Combined with the Combine function  
• Combined with the Magazine or Booklet function  
195  
Copying  
A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.  
2
B Press the [Stamp] key.  
C Press the [Date Stamp] key.  
D Press the [All Pages] or [1st Page Only] to select the print page.  
To change the style of date  
A Press the [Change style] key.  
196  
Stamp  
B Select the style of date.  
2
C Press the [OK] key.  
To change the stamp position  
A Press the [Change] key.  
B Select the desired position of the Date Stamp.  
C Press the [OK] key.  
E After you specified all the desired settings, press the [OK] key.  
Note  
To cancel the settings, press the [Cancel] key.  
197  
Copying  
F Press the [OK] key.  
2
G Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
Page Numbering  
Use this function to print page numbers on your copies. There are six types of  
Page Numbering (n is the total number of pages in your original):  
• Type A: P1,P2,…Pn  
• Type B: 1/n,2/n,...n/n  
• Type C: -1-,-2-,...-n-  
• Type D: P.1,P.2,...P.n  
• Type E: 1, 2…n  
• Type F: 1-1,1-2,..1-n  
Limitation  
You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.  
Note  
You can change the Page Numbering settings with the User Tools. See ⇒  
P.326 “Page Numbering”.  
The font and size of Page Numbering can be changed with the User Tools. See  
“Font” and “Size” in P.326 “Page Numbering”.  
You can select whether the Page Numbering is printed negative if it overlaps  
black parts of image. See “Superimpose” in P.326 “Page Numbering”.  
You can choose the default settings for the stamp position with the User  
Tools. See “Position Priority” in P.326 “Page Numbering”.  
You can choose the default settings for the stamp format with the User Tools.  
See “Format Priority” in P.326 “Page Numbering”.  
The font, size and superimpose settings are linked with the Date Stamp func-  
tion.  
You cannot combine the Page Numbering function with the Image Repeat or  
Double Copies function.  
198  
   
Stamp  
The relationship between the direction in which you set the original and the  
Page Numbering orientation/position is as follows:  
2
GCSTMP8E  
You can change the stamp position to top, bottom, left and right each way in  
1mm, 0.1" steps. See “Position Priority” in P.326 “Page Numbering”.  
If you combine this function with the Duplex (Top to Top) function and select  
the “P1, P2” or “1/n, 2/n” style, the page numbers on the back of the copy  
paper are printed as follows.  
2
1
GCSTMPBE  
1. Front  
2. Back  
If you combine this function with the Duplex (Top to Top) function, you can  
change the setting to stamp on the back side in the same position as the front  
side. See “Duplex Back Page Number Position” in P.326 “Page Numbering”.  
If you use this function with the Combine, Magazine, or Booklet function, the  
page is stamped as follows.  
199  
Copying  
Page Numbering per original  
• Combined with 1 Sided/2 Sided in the Combine function  
2
• Combined with the Magazine or Booklet function  
Page Numbering per copy  
• Combined with 1 Sided/2 Sided in the Combine function  
See “Page Numbering In Combine Mode” in P.326 “Page Numbering”.  
If you use the “1-1, 1-2” style, you can print page numbers on the slip sheets  
in Designate or Chapters mode. See “Copy On Slip Sheet In Designate Mode”  
in P.326 “Page Numbering”.  
A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.  
200  
Stamp  
B Press the [Stamp] key.  
C Press the [Page Numbering] key.  
D Select the style.  
2
E To change the stamp position, press the [Change] key.  
If you do not wish to change the stamp position, go to step G.  
F Select the stamp position, then press the [OK] key.  
G To change the first printing page and start number, press the [Change] key.  
201  
Copying  
Note  
The display differs depending on the selected style.  
If you do not wish to change, press the [OK] key and set your originals, then  
press the {Start} key.  
H Specify the page and number.  
2
If you selected (P1,P2…, -1-,-2-…, P.1, P.2…, 1, 2…, )  
A Press the [First Printing Page] key, then enter the original sheet number  
from which to start numbering with the number keys.  
Note  
To change the number entered, press the [Clear] or {Clear/Stop} key and  
enter a new number.  
B Press the {#} key.  
C Press the [Start Numbering From] key, then enter the number from which to  
start numbering with the number keys.  
D Press the {#} key.  
202  
Stamp  
E Press the [Last Number] key, then enter the page number at which to stop  
numbering with the number keys.  
2
Note  
If you wish to print onto the last page, press the [To The End] key and go  
to step J.  
F Press the {#} key.  
If you selected (1/5,2/5…)  
A Press the [First Printing Page] key, then enter the original sheet number  
from which to start numbering with the number keys.  
Note  
To change the number entered, press the [Clear] or {Clear/Stop} key and  
enter a new number.  
B Press the {#} key.  
C Press the [Start Numbering From] key, then enter the page number from  
which to start numbering with the number keys.  
D Press the {#} key.  
203  
Copying  
E Press the [Last Number] key, then enter the page number at which to stop  
numbering with the number keys.  
2
Note  
If you wish to print onto the last page, press [To The End] key and go to  
step J.  
F Press the {#} key.  
G Press the [Total Pages] key, then enter the total number of original pages  
with the number keys.  
H Press the {#} key.  
If you selected (1-1, 1-2,…)  
A Press the [First Printing Page] key, then enter the original sheet number  
from which to start numbering with the number keys.  
Note  
To change the number entered, press the [Clear] or {Clear/Stop} key and  
enter a new number.  
B Press the {#} key.  
204  
Stamp  
C Press the [Chapter Number From] key, then enter the chapter number from  
which to start numbering with the number keys.  
2
D Press the {#} key.  
E Press the [Start Numbering From] key, then enter the page number from  
which to start numbering with the number keys.  
F Press the {#} key.  
I Press the [OK] key.  
Note  
To change the settings after pressing the [OK] key, press the [Change] key  
and enter the new value.  
J Press the [OK] key.  
Note  
To cancel the settings, press the [Cancel] key.  
K Set your originals, then press the {Start} key.  
205  
Copying  
Combination Chart  
The combination chart given below shows which modes can be used together.  
When you read the chart, see the following table:  
means that these modes can be used together.  
means that these modes cannot be used together. The mode  
after you select will be the mode you're working in.  
2
×
means that these modes cannot be used together. The mode  
before you select will be the mode you're working in.  
The following shows the combinations of functions.  
Mode after you Select  
Stamp  
Batch (SADF) -- ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
Mixed Sizes  
-- ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
SelectingCopy ❍ ❍ -- ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
Paper  
Auto Paper  
Select  
❍ ❍ ❍ -- ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ → → ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
Auto Reduce/ ❍ ❍ ❍ -- ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × → → → ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
Enlarge  
Sort  
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ -- → → ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
× ❍ ❍ ❍ -- × → × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ → × -- × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ → → -- × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×  
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ -- ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×  
Rotate Sort  
Stack  
Staple  
Punch  
Copying From ❍ ❍ ❍ → × × × × × -- × ❍ ❍ × × ❍ ❍ × × × × × × ❍ ❍ ❍ × × × × × × ❍  
The Bypass  
Tray  
Preset Reduce/ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ -- → → ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
Enlarge  
Shrink&Center ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × -- ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
Zoom  
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ -- ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
Size  
Magnification  
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ -- ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
Duplex  
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ -- → → → → → → → × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
Combine  
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ -- → → → → → → × × × × ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
206  
   
Combination Chart  
Mode after you Select  
Stamp  
2
Book1  
Sided  
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ → → -- → → → → → × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
2 Sided1 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ → → → -- → → → → × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
Sided  
1 Sided2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ → → → → -- → → → × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
Sided  
2 Sided2 × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ → → → → → -- → → × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
Sided  
Booklet  
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ → → → → → → -- → × × × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ → → → → → → → -- × × × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × × × × × × -- → × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
Magazine  
Cover/  
Designate/  
Chapters  
Slip Sheet  
× × × × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × × ❍ ❍ × × × × → -- × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
Double  
Repeat  
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × × × × -- ❍ ❍ ❍ × × × × × ❍  
❍ ❍ ❍ × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × × × × → -- ❍ ❍ ❍ × × × × × ❍  
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ -- ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
Margin  
Adjust  
Erase  
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ -- ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ -- ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × × ❍ ❍ ❍ -- ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍  
Centering  
Back-  
ground  
Number-  
ing  
Preset  
Stamp  
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ -- × ❍ ❍ ❍  
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × -- ❍ ❍ ❍  
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ -- ❍ ❍  
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ -- ❍  
User  
Stamp  
Date  
Stamp  
Page  
Number-  
ing  
Copy Face Up ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ --  
207  
Copying  
2
208  
3. Document Server  
Overview  
The Document Server enables you to save documents in the machine memory  
and then edit and print them as you want.  
There are two ways to save documents.  
• Scanning from the document feeder  
• Scanning from the exposure glass  
1
2
3
GCDCSV0E  
A Prepare the documents you want to save.  
B Save the documents.  
The documents are saved in the machine memory.  
C Print the documents.  
You can print saved documents with any settings you desire at any time.  
Document Server Features  
The following printing features are available with the Document Server.  
On Demand Printing  
You can print the saved documents as you want at any time.  
File Merge Printing  
You can combine multiple documents to print them in one set.  
209  
       
Document Server  
Features and Benefits  
On Demand Printing  
Use to print any saved document as required.  
Your current situation might be…  
• When you need to print multiple sets of documents double-sided and sta-  
pled together, you normally print the originals, make duplex copies and  
then staple them together manually.  
3
GCDCSV1E  
With the Document Server  
If you save your document in the Document Server, you can print it out at any  
time with the necessary print settings, such as duplex and stapling. Your doc-  
uments will not be confused with those of others in the exit tray.  
GCDCSV2E  
Note  
Stapling requires the installation of the optional finisher.  
Punching requires the installation of the optional punch kit in the finisher.  
You can use a password to prevent others from printing saved documents.  
210  
       
Features and Benefits  
File Merge Printing  
You can combine multiple scanned documents to print them in one set.  
Your current situation might be…  
You want to combine several originals that are different in density, size, and  
paper weight, e.g.  
• Scrapped and pasted originals  
• Photo originals  
• One sided originals  
• Two sided originals  
3
With the Document Server  
You can save the originals individually by making the best settings for each  
original, and edit them as a file.  
It does not matter whether the originals were scanned using the document  
feeder or the exposure glass. As you can specify the print order for several  
files, you can combine them as you want, and print them as a file.  
GCDCSV3E  
You can check the print result by printing a sample set before making a large  
print run by pressing the {Sample Copy} key.  
If you are not satisfied with the print result of some pages of the set, you have  
only to scan that part again.  
211  
   
Document Server  
Scanning Originals  
You can scan the originals you want to save in the Document Server using the  
control panel of the machine. The originals can be set either on the exposure  
glass or into the document feeder.  
The saved documents will automatically be named in the order of scanning as  
“Scan001”, “Scan002”….  
Note  
You can set the timer to delete the documents stored in the Document Server  
with the User Tools. See “Auto File Delete” in P.331 “Count Manager” .  
3
You can change the file names that are assigned automatically.  
You can use a password to prevent others from printing saved documents.  
A Press the {Document Server/New Job} key.  
Copy  
New Job  
Document Server  
New Job  
Job List  
ZBQS120N  
The “Document Server: Files” display appears.  
B Press the [Scan Originals] key.  
212  
   
Scanning Originals  
The “Doc. server: Scanning” display appears.  
C Enter a file name.  
3
Note  
If you do not wish to register a file name, go to step D.  
If you do not register a file name, it is stored automatically.  
To set the file name  
A Press the [Change File Name] key.  
B Enter the new file name using the letter keys on the display panel.  
Note  
You can enter up to 8 letters.  
To switch to the capital letter mode or small letter mode, press the [Upper  
Case] or [Lower Case] key.  
To change the letter entered, press the [Back Space], [Clear], or {Clear/  
Stop} key and enter new letters. To delete the entered letters in 1 letter  
steps, press the [BackSpace] key. To delete all the entered letters, press  
the [Clear] or {Clear/Stop} key.  
C Press the [OK] key.  
D Enter your password.  
Note  
If you do not wish to enter a password, go to step E.  
213  
Document Server  
To set the password  
A Press the [Change Password] key.  
B Enter the password using the number keys (4 digits).  
3
Note  
To change the number entered, press the [Clear] or {Clear/Stop} key and  
enter a new number.  
C Press the [OK] or {#} key.  
E Set your originals either on the exposure glass or into the document feeder.  
Reference  
For more information on the types of originals that can be set and how to  
set them, see P.31 “Setting Originals”.  
F Make any desired settings.  
Note  
Press the [Scanning Complete] key to cancel the file name, password, or print  
settings and return to the “Document Server: Files” display.  
Reference  
For details, see the explanations of each function in this manual.  
G Press the {Start} key.  
The document is saved in the Document Server. The saved documents are  
displayed on the “Document Server: Files” display.  
214  
Scanning Originals  
Note  
If you have set your originals in the document feeder, the “Document Serv-  
er: Files” display appears automatically after all originals have been  
scanned.  
If you have set your originals on the exposure glass, press the [Scanning  
Complete] key after all originals have been scanned. The “Document Server:  
Files” display appears.  
To stop scanning, press the {Clear/Stop} key.  
To resume the paused scanning job, press the [Resume] key in the confir-  
mation dialog box. To delete the saved images and cancel the job, press the  
3
[
Cancel] key.  
When storing a password, appears on the left side of the file name.  
To change the file name or password  
A Press the line of the document whose file name or password you want to  
change.  
B If you select a document which requires a password, the “Input the Pass-  
word” window appears. Input the password using the number keys,  
then press the [OK] key.  
C Press the [Stored data list] key.  
D Press the [Change File Name] or [Change Password] key.  
E Enter the new file name or password using the letter keys or number  
keys.  
F Press the [OK] key.  
215  
Document Server  
Printing Saved Documents  
You can print any of the documents saved in the Document Server.  
Follow these steps to select a document and print it out.  
A Press the {Document Server/New Job} key.  
The “Document Server: Files” display appears.  
B Press the line for the document you want to print.  
3
The selected line is highlighted.  
Note  
You can search the document you desire by the file name. See P.219 “To  
Search by File Name”.  
You can sort the files in order of [File Name], [Time], or [Print order]. Press the  
key you want to sort by.  
If the desired file name is not shown, see the next or previous screen using  
the [T Next] and [U Prev.] keys.  
If you cannot choose the desired document by its name, you can print the  
first page to check the contents. Press the line for the desired document,  
and press the [Print 1st Page] key followed by the {Start} key.  
Press the selected line again to cancel the print job.  
If you select a document which requires a password, the “Input the Pass-  
word” window appears. Enter your password using the number keys,  
then press the [OK] key. To delete the value entered, press the [Clear] or  
{Clear/Stop} key. To cancel a selected document, press the [Cancel] key.  
216  
   
Printing Saved Documents  
C To print more than one document, repeat step B to select the desired docu-  
ments in the order you want to print them out.  
The selected order is shown in the priority column next to the selected docu-  
ment(s).  
Note  
To change the print order, press the highlighted lines to return to the nor-  
mal conditions, then select them again in the order you want to print.  
Press the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key to cancel all the settings.  
D If you need to change any of the print settings, press the [Print Setting] key.  
3
The “Document Server: Print Conditions” display appears.  
Note  
The print settings remain in the machine after printing.  
The print settings of the document you select first are applied to the  
merged documents.  
If you select multiple files, you can confirm the file names or print order of  
the files you selected in step C by scrolling through the list with the [T] and  
[U] keys.  
Press the [Select File] key to return to the “Document Server: Files” display.  
Reference  
For details, see the explanations of each function in this manual.  
E Enter the required number of prints using the number keys.  
Note  
Up to 999 can be entered.  
217  
Document Server  
To change the value entered, press the {Clear/Stop} key and enter new val-  
ue.  
If you print more than one set using the Sort function, you can check the  
print result by printing out only the first set. See P.218 “Sample Printing”.  
F Press the {Start} key.  
The machine starts printing.  
Note  
To pause the print job, press the {Clear/Stop} key. In the confirmation dia-  
log box, press the [Resume] key to resume it, or press the [Cancel] key to can-  
cel it.  
3
Sample Printing  
If you print multiple sets using the Sort function, you can check if the print order  
or the print settings are correct by printing out only the first set using the {Sample  
Copy} key.  
Limitation  
This function can be used only when the Sort function has been turned on.  
A Follow steps A to E of the preceding procedure.  
B Press the {Sample Copy} key.  
C After the first set is printed out, press the [Resume] key to print the rest of  
the print job. Press the [Cancel] key to cancel it and return back to the “Doc-  
ument Server: Print Conditions” menu for changing the setting.  
Print First Page  
You can print the first page of the document selected in the “Document Server:  
Files” display to check the contents.  
If more than one document is selected, the first page of each document is print-  
ed.  
A Press the line for the desired document(s) in the “Document Server: Files”  
display, and press the [Print 1st Page] key.  
B Press the {Start} key.  
The first page is printed out.  
218  
     
Printing Saved Documents  
To Search by File Name  
You can search the document stored in the Document Server by the file name.  
A Press the {Document Server/New Job} key.  
The “Document Server: Files” display appears.  
B Press the [File Name] key.  
C Enter the file name using the letter keys.  
Note  
3
You can enter up to 8 letters.  
To switch to the capital letter mode or small letter mode, press the [Upper  
Case] or [Lower Case] key.  
To change the letter entered, press the [Back Space], [Clear], or {Clear/Stop}  
key and enter new letters. To delete the entered letters in 1 letter steps,  
press the [Back Space] key. To delete all the entered letters, press the [Clear  
]
or {Clear/Stop} key.  
D Press the [OK] key.  
Only the files beginning with the letters appear in the “Document Server:  
Files” display.  
Note  
To display all the files saved in the Document Server, press the [All the files  
]
key.  
219  
   
Document Server  
Deleting Saved Documents  
You should delete any of the saved documents using the control panel of the ma-  
chine.  
This section describes how to delete saved documents.  
Important  
You can save up to 200 documents in the Document Server. No more docu-  
ments can be saved, when there are 200 documents in the Document Server.  
You should delete unnecessary documents.  
3
You can set the timer to delete the documents stored in the Document Server  
with the User Tools. See “Auto File Delete” in P.331 “Count Manager”.  
Note  
You can delete all the saved documents at a time with the User Tools. See  
“Delete All The Saved Files” in P.331 “Count Manager”.  
Follow these steps to delete saved documents.  
A Press the {Document Server/New Job} key.  
The “Document Server: Files” display appears.  
B Select a document you want to delete by pressing the name of it.  
The selected name is highlighted.  
Note  
You can search the document you desire by the file name. See P.219 “To  
Search by File Name”.  
You can sort the files in order of [File Name], [Time], or [Print order]. Press the  
key you want to sort by.  
If the desired file name is not shown, see the next or previous screen using  
the [T Next] and [U Prev.] keys.  
If you cannot choose the desired document by its name, you can print the  
first page to check the contents. Press the line for the desired document,  
and press the [Print 1st Page] key followed by the {Start} key.  
Press the selected line again to cancel the print job.  
220  
   
Deleting Saved Documents  
If you select a document which requires a password, the “Input the Pass-  
word” window appears. Enter your password using the number keys, and  
press the [OK] key. To delete the value entered, press the [Clear] or {Clear/  
Stop} key. To cancel a selected document, press the [Cancel] key.  
C Repeat step B if you want to select more than one document.  
D Press the [Delete] key.  
A confirmation dialog box appears.  
3
E Press the [Delete] key to delete it.  
Note  
To cancel the delete operation, press the [Stop] key.  
221  
Document Server  
3
222  
4. Connect Copy (Option)  
What is Connect Copy?  
Connect Copy is a feature that allows you to connect two machines together us-  
ing a cable. When you set up your copy job on one machine (the master unit),  
data is transferred to the other machine (the sub-unit) so that copies can be made  
on both machines simultaneously.  
GCC  
Connect Copy benefits  
Connect Copy provides the following benefits:  
High-speed copying for greater productivity  
For large volume copy runs, two connected machines form a single system  
that can complete the job in a shorter time. If two 70 copies/minute (A4K, 81/  
2" × 11"Ksize) copiers are connected together, a 140 copies/minute (A4K, 81/  
2" × 11"Ksize) speed will be available.  
Auto-backup system for less participation of operators  
Even if one machine stops because of a paper jam, it has run out of toner, or  
run out of paper, the other machine will take over and finish the job automat-  
ically. If the stopped machine is recovered, the machines will allocate the job  
again and continue using Connect Copy to complete the job in a way that re-  
sults in maximum productivity.  
223  
     
Connect Copy (Option)  
Note  
You cannot make other copy jobs when two machines are connected.  
The two machines automatically share the job in order to finish at almost  
the same time and provide maximum productivity.  
To use the two machines separately again, press the [Connect] key to dis-  
connect them.  
4
224  
How Connect Copy Works  
How Connect Copy Works  
In this manual, we refer to the two machines as the master unit and sub-unit re-  
spectively.  
4
ZBQP190E  
1. Master unit  
2. Sub-unit  
As your original is scanned in, the image data is stored on the master unit hard  
disk and transferred simultaneously to the sub-unit hard disk. As soon as scan-  
ning has finished, copying starts.  
The master unit is the machine at which you press the [Connect] key to enter Con-  
nect Copy mode. When you do this, the other machine becomes the sub-unit.  
You can use either machine as the master unit or sub-unit, but you cannot  
change the relationship without exiting Connect Copy mode first.  
Connectable Copier Models  
• The master unit and sub-unit do not have to be same speed models.  
Master Unit  
Sub-Unit  
55 copies/minute copier  
55 copies/minute copier  
70 copies/minute copier  
70 copies/minute copier  
55 copies/minute copier  
70 copies/minute copier  
55 copies/minute copier  
70 copies/minute copier  
• You can still use Connect Copy even if no optional finisher, booklet finisher,  
or large capacity tray (LCT) is available. However, the optional finisher must  
be installed in both units in order to use the Stack and Staple functions, the  
optional finisher and punch kit must be installed in both units in order to use  
the Punch function, and the optional booklet finisher must be installed in both  
units in order to use the Stack and Saddle Stitch function.  
225  
           
Connect Copy (Option)  
Functions Not Available with Connect Copy  
The following functions are not available in Connect Copy mode:  
• Job Preset  
Interrupt Functions  
• You cannot use Connect Copy when a job has been paused using the Inter-  
rupt function.  
• You can use the Interrupt function on the sub-unit while in Connect Copy  
mode, but only when the master unit is not scanning originals.  
4
Before You Start  
Both units must have paper trays loaded with paper of the same size, direction  
and type that you wish to copy onto.  
To make the most out of the Connect Copy feature, we recommend that:  
• The paper tray settings of the master unit and sub-unit match each other.  
• The “Original Mode Quality Level” of the User Tools settings should be the  
same on each unit. If they are not the same, the copied images may differ. See  
“Original Mode Quality Level” in P.310 “General Features 1/3.  
• If the installations of the optional finisher or booklet finisher in both units are  
not the same, the copied images may differ.  
226  
         
Connect Copy Display Panel  
Connect Copy Display Panel  
This section describes the displays on the master unit and sub-unit.  
Note that when you enter Connect Copy mode, you must access all Connect  
Copy features and menus through the master unit display panel.  
Master unit  
Sub-unit  
4
227  
   
Connect Copy (Option)  
Master unit  
Sub-unit  
4
How many original pages have been  
scanned by the master unit so far.  
Not displayed on sub-unit.  
228  
Connect Copy Display Panel  
Master unit  
Sub-unit  
How many sets/copies to make.  
Not displayed on sub-unit.  
Displays how many sets/copies made  
by the master unit so far. *1  
Displays how many sets/copies made  
by the sub-unit so far.  
4
Only paper trays loaded with the paper Only paper trays loaded with the paper  
of the same size, direction and type in- of the same size, direction and type in-  
stalled in both the master unit and sub- stalled in both the master unit and sub-  
unit are displayed.  
unit are available.  
Other paper tray types will be grayed  
out and you cannot select them. *2  
Note that you can only select the copy  
paper from the master unit control pan-  
el.  
*1  
*2  
When two or more pages are being copied using Sort and Staple, you can check how  
many sets have been copied so far. To toggle the copy counter between the master  
unit total and the total for both units, press the area that displays the number of cop-  
ies. “Copy” means the number of sets made so far by the master unit and “Total”  
means the total number of sets made so far by both units.  
The bypass tray can be used only for the Cover/Designate functions.  
229  
   
Connect Copy (Option)  
Using Connect Copy  
You can select Connect Copy mode from either of the two connected machines  
by pressing the [Connect] key. The machine you use becomes the master unit,  
and the other machine the sub-unit.  
Limitation  
Once Connect Copy is selected, you must carry out all operations on the mas-  
ter unit.  
Note  
You can select whether the [Connect] key is displayed or not with the User  
Tools. See “Connect Copy Master” in P.331 “Count Manager”.  
4
A Make sure that the machine is in Copy mode.  
Note  
If the User Codes are turned on, enter a user code programmed in the mas-  
ter unit using the number keys (maximum 8 digits) then press the [  
#] key.  
You do not need to enter the user code for the sub-unit.  
Reference  
P.90 “User Codes”  
B Press the [Connect] key on the machine that is to be the master unit.  
When the key darkens, the two units are connected.  
Master unit display  
230  
     
Using Connect Copy  
Sub-unit display  
Reference  
If the [Connect] key is not visible or you cannot select it, see P.252 “Con-  
nect Copy”.  
If you press the [Connect] key and the message “Connect Copy is not avail-  
able at this time. Please check the connected machine. Press [Cancel], con-  
nect copy will be cancelled.” appears, see P.249 “Connect Copy”.  
4
C Set your originals in the master unit.  
Reference  
P.31 “Setting Originals”  
D Make any settings you require on the master unit.  
231  
 
Connect Copy (Option)  
Note  
Any copy settings that were set up before you entered Connect Copy mode  
will still remain in effect. However, if optional finishers are not installed on  
both the master unit and sub-unit, the Stack, Staple and Punch functions  
will be automatically disabled.  
To exit Connect Copy mode, press the [Connect] key on the master unit  
Reference  
For more information on functions you can use with Connect Copy, see ⇒  
P.13 “Function List Based on Options”.  
E Enter the number of copies you require using the number keys.  
Sample Copy  
4
Start  
Clear/Stop  
Enter  
TSPS020N  
Note  
You can enter up to 999 copies.  
If you make a mistake, press the {Clear/Stop} key and enter a new number.  
Even though Connect Copy is selected, only the master unit will make cop-  
ies in the following situations:  
• When making a single copy set  
• When the original is a single sheet and you enter a low number of cop-  
ies/sets  
F Press the {Start} key on the master unit.  
Copying starts after the original has been scanned.  
If you set originals in the document feeder  
A Copying starts simultaneously in the master unit and sub-unit after all  
originals have been scanned.  
If you set originals on the exposure glass  
A Set the next page(s) when scanning has finished, then press {Start} key.  
B When all pages have been scanned in, press the {#} key. Copying starts  
simultaneously in the master unit and sub-unit.  
232  
 
Using Connect Copy  
If you use Batch (SADF) mode  
A Set your originals and press the {Start} key. After all the previously set  
originals are fed, set the next originals while the Auto Feed indicator is  
lit.  
B When all pages have been scanned in, press the {#} key. Copying starts  
simultaneously in the master and sub-unit.  
Note  
To stop originals from being scanned or copied, press the {Clear/Stop}  
key on the master unit, then press the [Cancel] key following the instruc-  
tions on the display.  
Reference  
See P.36 “Batch (SADF) mode”.  
4
If the size of scanned data exceeds memory capacity, the memory over-  
flow message is displayed. Follow the instructions in “When Memory  
Is Full”. See P.262 “Connect Copy”.  
G Pick up your copies from the master unit and sub-unit.  
Note  
The number of sheets and sets copied by the master unit and sub-unit may  
be different.  
The master unit and sub-unit may not finish copying at the same time.  
When using the Sort/Staple function, copies are organized into copy sets.  
If there is a paper jam in one machine during this process, it is not possible  
for the other machine to take over the copy set processing of the down ma-  
chine.  
-Copy output order  
When copying in Sort/Staple mode  
e.g., copying 6-sets of a 3-sheet original  
• Copying with the master unit (face down output)—sub-unit (face down  
output)  
233  
Connect Copy (Option)  
GCCONN1E  
1. Master unit  
2. Sub-unit  
4
When using Sort/Staple, your copies sets are not split between the master  
unit and sub-unit.  
When copying without Sort/Staple mode  
e.g., making 2 copies of each page of a 6-sheet original  
• Copying with the master unit (face down output)—sub-unit (face up out-  
put)  
GCCONN2E  
1. Master Unit  
2. Sub-Unit  
Combine your copy stacks from the master unit and sub-unit as shown in  
the diagram.  
-Auto Reset  
The machine exits Connect Copy mode and automatically returns to the initial  
condition a certain period of time after your job has finished. This function is  
called “Auto Reset”.  
234  
 
Using Connect Copy  
Note  
When the master unit “Auto Reset Timer” of the User Tools delay elapses, the  
master unit will be reset automatically.  
When the sub-unit “System Reset” of the User Tools (System Settings) delay  
elapses, Interrupt mode will be cancelled on the sub-unit.  
Reference  
See “Auto Reset Timer” in P.310 “General Features 1/3.  
See “System Reset” in the System Settings manual.  
-Auto Off  
4
The machine turns itself off automatically a certain period of time after your job  
has finished. This function is called “Auto Off”.  
Note  
You can change the Auto Off time.  
Reference  
See “Auto Off Timer” in the System Settings manual.  
Exiting Connect Copy Mode  
This procedure describes how to exit Connect Copy mode and return to the stan-  
dard copying functions.  
A Press the [Connect] key on the master unit.  
The [Connect] key will be deselected.  
Note  
Settings that were selected on the master unit while in Connect Copy mode  
will not be cleared.  
235  
     
Connect Copy (Option)  
If you press the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key on the master unit, Connect  
Copy mode is canceled and the master unit returns to the initial condition  
of the Copy mode.  
Reference  
If you cannot exit Connect Copy mode by pressing the [Connect] key, see  
P.255 “If You Cannot Exit Connect Copy”.  
Printing Saved Documents with Connect Copy  
You can print any of the documents saved in the Document Server using Con-  
nect Copy.  
4
Note  
Use the machine that saved the documents in the Document Server as the  
master unit.  
A Press the {Document Server/New Job} key on the master unit.  
The “Document Server: Files” display appears.  
B Press the line for the document you want to print.  
The selected line is highlighted.  
Note  
You can search the document you desire by the file name. See P.219 “To  
Search by File Name”.  
236  
 
Using Connect Copy  
You can sort the files in order of [File Name], [Time], or [Print order]. Press the  
key you want to sort by.  
If the desired file name is not shown, see the next or previous screen using  
the [T Next] and [U Prev.] keys.  
If you cannot choose the desired document by its name, you can print the  
first page to check the contents. Press the line for the desired document,  
and press the [Print 1st Page] key followed by the {Start} key.  
Press the selected line again to cancel the print job.  
If you select a document which requires a password, the “Input the Pass-  
word” window appears. Enter your password using the number keys, and  
press the [OK] key. To delete the value entered, press the [Clear] or {Clear/  
Stop} key. To cancel a selected document, press the [Cancel] key.  
C To print more than one document, repeat step B to select the desired docu-  
4
ments in the order you want to print them out.  
The selected order is shown in the priority column next to the selected docu-  
ment(s).  
Note  
To change the print order, press the highlighted lines to return to the nor-  
mal conditions, then select them again in the order you want to print.  
Press the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key to cancel all the settings.  
D If you need to change any of the print settings, press the [Print Setting] key.  
The “Document Server: Print Conditions” menu appears.  
Note  
The print settings remain in the machine after printing.  
237  
Connect Copy (Option)  
The print settings of the document you select first are applied to the  
merged documents.  
If you select multiple files, you can confirm the file names or print order of  
the files you selected in step C by scrolling through the list with the [T] and  
[U] keys.  
Press the [Select File] key to return to the “Document Server: Files” display.  
Reference  
For details, see the explanations of each function in this manual.  
E Press the [Connect] key.  
When the key darkens, the two units are connected.  
F Enter the required number of prints using the number keys.  
4
Note  
Up to 999 can be entered.  
To change the value entered, press the {Clear/Stop} key and enter a new  
value.  
If you print more than one set using the Sort function, you can check the  
print result by printing out only the first set. See P.218 “Sample Printing”.  
G Press the {Start} key.  
Printing starts after the image data stored in the master unit has been trans-  
ferred to the sub-unit.  
Note  
The printing may take some time after transferring the image data to the  
sub-unit.  
To stop originals from being printed, press the {Clear/Stop} key on the mas-  
ter unit, then press the [Cancel] key following the instructions on the dis-  
play.  
The number of sheets and sets printed by the master unit and sub-unit may  
be different.  
The master unit and sub-unit may not finish printing at the same time.  
238  
Relationship Between Master Unit and Sub-Unit System Settings  
Relationship Between Master Unit and  
Sub-Unit System Settings  
This section describes which System Settings are used by the master unit and  
sub-unit in Connect Copy mode.  
Note  
In Connect Copy mode, the {User Tools/Counter} key on the sub-unit is dis-  
abled. To access the User Tools on the sub-unit, you need to exit Connect  
Copy mode first.  
Reference  
For details, see the System Settings manual.  
4
Symbol  
Meaning  
The master unit and sub-unit use each setting  
Both units use the master unit setting  
Unrelated  
Depends on the function  
Menu  
Master  
unit  
Sub-unit Remarks  
Basic Page 1  
Operation Panel Beeper  
Ready Operation Panel  
Beeper  
Copy Count Display  
The copy counter is always  
displayed in count up mode.  
Auto Response (Human)  
Sensor  
Invalid  
Disabled even if the sub-unit  
setting is “Yes”.  
Auto Tray Switching  
Auto Off Timer  
Low Power Shift Time  
Low Power Timer  
In Connect Copy mode, nei-  
ther unit will enter any of En-  
ergy Saver modes (Low  
Power mode, Energy Saver  
mode). When Connect Copy  
is exited, the machines will  
enter Energy Saver mode af-  
ter the programmed delay  
elapses.  
239  
   
Connect Copy (Option)  
Menu  
Master  
unit  
Sub-unit Remarks  
ADF Orig. Ejection  
<F/F4>Size Setting  
Basic Page 2  
System Reset  
Interrupt mode on the sub-  
unit will be cleared by this  
timer.  
Function Priority  
When the time set in “Auto  
Reset Timer” of the User  
Tools on the master unit pass-  
es and Connect Copy is can-  
celed, and then the time set in  
“System Reset” of the User  
Tools (System Settings) pass-  
es, it returns to the function  
defined by the “Function Pri-  
ority” of the User Tools (Sys-  
tem Settings) setting.  
4
Copy/Document Server:  
Output Tray  
Staple initialization  
Set Time  
Set Date  
Set Time  
Weekly Timer:Monday to  
Sunday  
The function is disabled on  
the sub-unit in Connect Copy  
mode. When Connect Copy is  
exited, the power will be  
switched off at the time speci-  
fied by the timer.  
Key Operator Code for Off  
Setting  
Paper Size Setting  
Paper Tray Priority  
Tray 1:Paper Size Setting  
Tray 2:Paper Size Setting  
Tray 3:Paper Size Setting  
We recommend that the mas-  
ter unit and sub-unit have the  
same paper tray settings. This  
is because only paper trays  
with the same size, direction,  
and type of paper can be used  
in Connect Copy mode.  
240  
Relationship Between Master Unit and Sub-Unit System Settings  
Menu  
Master  
unit  
Sub-unit Remarks  
Bypass: Special Paper Indica-   
tion  
Can be used only with the  
Cover/Designate functions.  
Tray 1: Special Paper Indica-  
tion  
We recommend that the mas-  
ter unit and sub-unit have the  
same paper tray settings. This  
is because only paper trays  
with the same size, direction,  
and type of paper can be used  
in Connect Copy mode.  
Tray 2: Special Paper Indica-  
tion  
Tray 3: Special Paper Indica-  
tion  
LCT: Special Paper Indica-  
tion  
4
Cover  
Slip Sheet 1  
Slip Sheet 2  
Count Manager  
Set User Codes  
Access these settings on the  
master unit. The master unit  
settings override those of the  
sub-unit.  
Key Counter  
You cannot control the op-  
tional Key Counter in Con-  
nect Copy mode.  
Set Key Card  
Key Operator Code  
AOF(Keep It On.)  
Neither the master unit nor  
sub-unit will be turned off by  
this function in Connect Copy  
mode. The power will go off  
after you have exited Connect  
Copy mode and the AOF De-  
lay has elapsed.  
Counter/Print  
241  
Connect Copy (Option)  
Relationship Between Master Unit and  
Sub-Unit Copy/Document Server Features  
This section describes which Copy/Document Server Features are used by the  
master unit and sub-unit in Connect Copy mode.  
Note  
In Connect Copy mode, the {User Tools/Counter} key on the sub-unit is dis-  
Copy mode first.  
Reference  
P.305 “User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)”  
4
Symbol  
Meaning  
The master unit and sub-unit use each setting  
Both units use the master unit setting  
Unrelated  
Menu  
Master  
unit  
Sub-unit Remarks  
General Features  
Auto Paper Select Priority  
Trays with the same size and  
direction of paper will be se-  
lected from the master unit  
and sub-unit automatically.  
Auto Paper Select Tray Dis-  
play  
The sub-unit displays the type  
of paper whether this function  
is selected or not.  
Auto Image Density Priority  
Original Mode Priority  
Original Mode Display  
Original Mode Quality Level  
Same level should be selected  
on both units.  
Original Image Density Lev-  
el  
Each unit uses its own pro-  
grammed value.  
Auto Reset Timer  
Connect Copy will be can-  
celled according to the timer  
on the master unit.  
Duplex Mode Priority  
242  
 
Relationship Between Master Unit and Sub-Unit Copy/Document Server Features  
Menu  
Master  
unit  
Sub-unit Remarks  
Copy Orientation in Duplex  
Mode  
Original Orientation in Du-  
plex Mode  
Initial Mode  
Maximum Copy Quantity  
Original Beeper  
Job End Call  
When turned on, the beeper  
sounds only on the master  
unit when copying is complet-  
ed. Only if the “Operation  
Panel Beeper” of the User  
Tools (System Settings)setting  
is “On”.  
4
Time for indicating job sta-  
tus  
Shortcut Keys:F1  
Shortcut Keys:F2  
Shortcut Keys:F3  
Shortcut Keys:F4  
Shortcut Keys:F5  
Reproduction Ratio  
Shortcut R/E  
R/E Priority  
Enlarge 1 – 5  
Priority Setting : Enlarge  
Reduce 1 – 6  
Priority Setting : Reduce  
Shrink&Center Ratio  
Page Format  
Front Margin: Left/Right  
Back Margin: Left/Right  
Front Margin: Top/Bottom  
243  
Connect Copy (Option)  
Menu  
Master  
unit  
Sub-unit Remarks  
Back Margin: Top/Bottom  
1 2 Duplex Auto Margin  
Adjust  
Erase Border  
Combine Orig. Shadow  
Erase  
Erase Center  
Repeat Separation Line  
Double Copies Separation  
Line  
4
Combine Separation Line  
Copy Back Cover  
Cover page in combine  
mode  
Designated Slip Sheet Copy  
In Combine  
Booklet/Magazine Original  
Orientation  
Copy Order In Combine  
Mode  
Stamp Setting  
Background Numbering  
Size  
Density  
Superimpose  
Preset Stamp  
Stamp Priority  
Stamp Language  
Stamp position  
Stamp condition  
Superimpose  
User Stamp  
244  
Relationship Between Master Unit and Sub-Unit Copy/Document Server Features  
Menu  
Master  
unit  
Sub-unit Remarks  
Program/Delete Stamp  
Stamp position  
Stamp condition  
Date Stamp  
Format  
Set the same stamp in the both  
unit.  
Font  
Position Priority  
Size  
Superimpose  
Page Numbering  
Format Priority  
Font  
4
Size  
Duplex Back Page Number  
Position  
Page Numbering In Com-  
bine Mode  
Copy On Slip Sheet In Desig-  
nate Mode  
Position Priority: P1, P2...  
Position Priority: 1/5, 2/5...  
Position Priority: -1-, -2-...  
Position Priority: P.1, P.2...  
Position Priority: 1, 2...  
Position Priority: 1-1,1-2...  
Superimpose  
Input/Output  
Batch (SADF) Auto Reset  
Time  
ARDF Original Table Rise  
Time  
245  
Connect Copy (Option)  
Menu  
Master  
unit  
Sub-unit Remarks  
Face-Up/Down Selection in  
Platen Mode  
This setting will be ignored  
and the setting programmed  
used.  
Reference  
See step G in P.230 “Us-  
ing Connect Copy”.  
Rotate Sort Auto Paper Con-  
tinue  
This function is effective when  
the “Auto Tray Switching” of  
the User Tools (System Set-  
tings) setting is “On (Rotate)”.  
4
Auto Sort Mode  
Memory Full Auto Scan Re-  
start  
Select Stack or Rotate sort  
Staple Position  
Paper Eject: Always Rotate  
180°  
Count Manager  
Check/Reset/Print Copy  
Counter  
User Code Register/  
Change/Delete  
Face-Up/Down Selection in  
Bypass Mode  
Connect Copy Master  
Auto File Delete  
Delete All The Saved Files  
246  
5. What to Do If Something  
Goes Wrong  
If Your Machine Does Not Operate as You  
Want  
General  
Machine Status  
Problem/Cause  
Action  
The machine instructs you The machine is warming  
Wait for the machine to  
warm-up.  
to wait.  
up.  
You can use Auto Start  
mode during warm-up  
period. See P.90 “Au-  
to Start”.  
Copy paper is moving in  
tray 1 (Tandem Tray).  
Wait for the machine.  
The machine cannot detect Improper original is set.  
the original size.  
Set non-standard size orig-  
See P.21 “Sizes difficult to inal on the exposure glass.  
detect”.  
See P.31 “Setting Origi-  
nals on the Exposure Glass”.  
Select paper manually, not  
in Auto Paper Select mode.  
Do not use Auto Reduce/  
Enlarge mode.  
Original is not set.  
Set your originals.  
The machine instructs you There is no copy paper that Set the original in the same  
to check the original direc- is in the same direction as direction as the copy paper.  
tion.  
the originals.  
The machine instructs you Improper original size is  
Select the proper paper  
size.  
to check paper size.  
set.  
The machine cannot per-  
form rotate-sorting for this no rotate-sorting is avail-  
paper size. able is selected.  
The size of paper for which Select the proper paper  
size. See P.55 “Sort”.  
The machine cannot punch --  
this size of paper.  
Select the proper paper size  
that can be used in Punch  
mode. See P.69 “Punch”.  
247  
       
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
Machine Status  
Problem/Cause  
Action  
The number of sheets that --  
can be stapled has been ex-  
ceeded.  
Check the stapler capacity.  
See P.60 “Staple”.  
The machine cannot staple --  
this size of paper.  
Select the proper paper size  
mode. See P.60 “Staple”.  
This paper is not available A paper size not available Select a paper size that can  
in Duplex mode.  
in Duplex mode has been  
selected.  
be used in Duplex mode.  
See P.111 “Duplex”.  
You cannot enter the de-  
sired copy set number.  
The number of copies ex-  
ceeds the maximum copy  
quantity.  
You can change the maxi-  
mum copy quantity that  
you can make at a time. See  
“Maximum Copy Quanti-  
ty” in P.313 “General Fea-  
tures 2/3”  
5
Document Server  
Machine Status  
Problem/Cause  
Action  
The machine asks you  
The number of scanned  
The maximum number of  
whether you want to store pages exceeds the capacity pages per file you can store  
pages where scanning is  
finished as 1 file.  
per file of the Document  
Server.  
is 1,200 pages in the Docu-  
ment Server. To store pages  
where scanning is finished  
as 1 file, press the [Yes] key.  
To cancel scanning, press  
the [No] key.  
Scanned pages became  
over 1,200 pages per file.  
The number of scanned  
pages exceeds the capacity files or pages per file you  
of the Document Server.  
The maximum number of  
can store is 200 files or  
1,200 pages in the Docu-  
ment Server. Delete any  
unnecessary files and then  
scan the document again.  
248  
If Your Machine Does Not Operate as You Want  
Connect Copy  
Machine Status  
Problem/Cause  
Action  
You cannot use Connect  
Copy.  
The sub-unit has a paper  
misfeed or needs a fresh  
supply of toner or other re- the instructions given on  
Press the [Cancel] key on  
the master unit and follow  
plenishable supply.  
the sub-unit display.  
See P.270 x Clear-  
ing Misfeeds”.  
See P.293 e Remov-  
ing Jammed Staples”.  
If the sub-unit display  
shows that a cover is open,  
follow the instructions giv-  
en. For all other situations,  
follow the instructions on  
the display.  
5
The User Tools menu is  
open on the sub-unit.  
Press the [Cancel] key on  
the master unit. Then on  
the sub-unit press the {User  
Tools/Counter} key to close  
the User Tools menu.  
The sub-unit is busy copy- Press the [Cancel] key on  
ing or printing with anoth- the master unit then stop  
er function.  
the sub-unit from copying/  
printing.  
The sub-unit is in Interrupt Press the [Cancel] key on  
mode.  
the master unit. Then press  
sub-unit to exit Interrupt  
mode.  
Reference  
P.88 “Interrupt Copy”  
249  
 
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
Machine Status  
Problem/Cause  
Action  
You cannot use Connect  
Copy.  
The sub-unit has been  
switched off automatically the master unit. Then on  
by the Weekly Timer func- the sub-unit enter the code  
Press the [Cancel] key on  
tion and is waiting for the and press the [ ] key.  
#
Key Operator Off Code to  
be entered.  
Reference  
See “Key Operator  
Code for Off Setting” in  
the System Settings  
manual.  
The sub-unit is not in Copy Press the [Cancel] key on  
mode (i.e., in Document  
Server mode).  
the master unit. Then press  
the {Copy/New Job} key on  
the sub-unit to switch over  
to Copy mode.  
The [Connect] key was  
pressed simultaneously on both the master unit and  
both the master unit and  
sub-unit.  
Press the [Cancel] key on  
5
sub-unit, then press the  
Connect] key on just one of  
them.  
[
L indicator is lit on the sub- Follow the instructions  
unit.  
shown on the display.  
You cannot use Connect  
The master unit is not in  
Press the [Cancel] key on  
Copy. The other machine is Copy mode (i.e., in Docu- the master unit. Then press  
in use.  
ment Server mode).  
the {Copy/New Job} key on  
the master unit to switch  
over to Copy mode.  
Document Server  
Problem  
Action  
You forgot your password.  
Without the password, you cannot edit or  
print the document. Scan the document  
again.  
You can delete all the saved documents at  
once with the User Tools. See “Delete All  
The Saved Files” in P.331 “Count Man-  
ager”  
Make sure that no important document is  
saved in the Document Server before de-  
leting all of the saved documents.  
250  
 
If Your Machine Does Not Operate as You Want  
Problem  
Action  
You cannot find out what is saved in a file. Check the date or time column in the  
“Document Server: Files” display.  
Check the contents of the document by  
printing the first page of it. Press the line  
for the desired document in the “Docu-  
[
Print 1st Page] key followed by the {Start}  
key.  
Memory becomes full frequently.  
Delete any unnecessary files. See P.220  
“Deleting Saved Documents”.  
You want to check the print result before Check the print result by printing out  
making a large print run.  
only the first set. See P.218 “Sample  
Printing”  
You want to save a document which can- Turn “Auto File Delete” off, then save the  
not be deleted automatically.  
document in the Document Server. See  
“Auto File Delete” in P.331 “Count  
Manager”.  
5
If you turn “Auto File Delete” on after  
saving the document, this function is ap-  
plied to the next saved documents.  
Display  
Machine Status  
Problem/Cause  
Action  
The display panel is off.  
The screen contrast knob is Set the screen contrast  
turned to the dark position. knob to the light position  
for proper viewing of the  
display panel.  
The machine is in Energy  
Saver mode.  
Press the {Clear Modes/Ener-  
gy Saver} key to cancel En-  
ergy Saver mode.  
The operation switch is  
turned off.  
Turn on the operation  
switch.  
Nothing happens when the The main power switch is Turn on the main power  
operation switch is turned turned off.  
on.  
switch.  
251  
 
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
Connect Copy  
Machine Status  
Problem/Cause  
Action  
The [Connect] key does not The main power switch on Turn on the sub-unit main  
appear on the display.  
the sub-unit is off.  
power switch.  
The operation switch on  
the sub-unit is off.  
Press the operation switch  
on the right side of the con-  
trol panel. The On indica-  
tor will goes on.  
Note  
The machine will be  
ready to operate about  
five minutes after turn-  
ing power on.  
The master unit is not in  
Copy mode (i.e., in Docu- key on the master unit to  
Press the {Copy/New Job}  
5
ment Server mode).  
switch to Copy mode.  
The master unit is in Inter- Press the {Interrupt} key on  
rupt mode.  
the master unit to exit In-  
terrupt mode.  
The master unit is in Job  
Preset mode.  
Exit Job Preset mode in one  
of the following ways.  
If you are still selecting  
copy settings and copy-  
ing has not started yet:  
Press the [Cancel] key  
then remove the origi-  
nals set in the master  
unit document feeder.  
If Job Preset mode is in  
progress:  
Press the {Clear/Stop}  
key, follow the instruc-  
tions on the display  
then press the [Cancel  
]
key.  
Reference  
See P.83 “Job Preset”.  
252  
 
If Your Machine Does Not Operate as You Want  
Machine Status  
Problem/Cause  
Action  
The [Connect] key does not The “Connect Copy Mas-  
Change the setting to “Yes”  
or press the [Connect] key  
appear on the display.  
ter” of the User Tools set-  
ting is “No”.  
Reference  
See “Connect Copy  
Master” in P.331  
“Count Manager”.  
The Connect Copy cable is Contact your service repre-  
damaged.  
sentative.  
L indicator is lit.  
Follow the instructions  
shown on the display.  
The [Connect] key is grayed The master unit is now  
out. copying or copying will  
Press the master unit  
{Clear/Stop} key to cancel  
start as soon as the warm- copying.  
up finished.  
5
Copying has stopped be-  
cause there is a paper mis- master unit.  
feed or toner has run out on  
the unit you wish to use as  
the master unit.  
Solve the problem on the  
Functionsare programmed Press the master unit {Clear  
that cannot be used with  
Connect Copy.  
functions.  
Reference  
P.13 “Function List  
Based on Options”  
253  
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
If Connect Copy Is Cleared  
Machine Status  
Problem/Cause  
Action  
Exited Connect Copy.  
The master unit main pow- Connect Copy is cancelled  
er switch has been turned and the display returns to  
off or the operation switch copy standby mode. On the  
has been pressed.  
master unit, either turn on  
the main power switch or  
press the operation switch,  
then press the [Connect] key  
and start your copy job  
again.  
Either the sub-unit main  
power switch has been  
A message requesting you  
to check the sub-unit is dis-  
turned off or the operation played on the master unit.  
switch has been pressed.  
Press the [Cancel] key and  
clear connect-copying. Ei-  
ther turn on the main pow-  
er switch on the sub-unit or  
press the operation switch  
and then press the [Con-  
nect] key.  
5
The Weekly Timer function Press the master unit oper-  
has automatically turned  
the master unit off.  
ation switch then press the  
[
Connect] key and copy.  
Reference  
See “Weekly Timer” in  
the System Settings  
manual.  
An error message indicat- L indicator is lit.  
ing a breakdown is shown  
on the master unit display.  
Copying is not possible.  
Follow the instructions dis-  
played in the error mes-  
sage.  
254  
 
If Your Machine Does Not Operate as You Want  
If You Cannot Exit Connect Copy  
Machine Status  
Problem/Cause  
Action  
Nothing happens when  
you press the [Connect] key. scanned or copied.  
Originals are being  
Press the master unit  
{Clear/Stop} key and then  
press the [Cancel] key to  
cancel scanning or copy-  
ing.  
There is a paper misfeed in Clear the paper misfeed in  
either the master unit or  
the master unit or sub-unit.  
sub-unit.  
P.270 x Clearing  
Misfeeds”  
P.293 e Removing  
Jammed Staples”  
5
If the display shows that a  
cover is open, follow the in-  
structions given. For all  
other situations, follow the  
instructions on the display.  
To exit Connect Copy  
mode, press the master  
unit {Clear/Stop} key, then  
press the [Connect] key.  
The master unit {Clear/  
To exit Connect Copy  
Stop} key was pressed and mode, follow the instruc-  
scanning of the original has tions on the display, then  
been interrupted.  
press the [Cancel] key.  
The {Clear/Stop} key was  
To exit Connect Copy  
pressed on either the mas- mode, follow the instruc-  
ter unit or sub-unit and  
copying has been inter-  
rupted.  
tions on the display, then  
press the [Cancel] key.  
255  
 
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
Machine Status  
Problem/Cause  
Action  
Nothing happens when  
you press the [Connect] key.  
The master unit or sub-unit Solve the problem in the  
needs a fresh supply of ton- appropriate unit.  
er or staples.  
per”  
P.285 d Adding Sta-  
ples”  
P.301 y Removing  
Punch Waste”  
For all other situations,  
follow the instructions  
on the display.  
To exit Connect Copy  
mode, press the master  
unit {Clear/Stop} key,  
5
then press the [Cancel  
]
key.  
A paper misfeed occurred Remove the misfed paper.  
during stapling.  
To exit Connect Copy  
mode, press the {Clear/  
Stop} key, then press the  
[
Connect] key.  
256  
If You Cannot Make Clear Copies  
If You Cannot Make Clear Copies  
Problem  
Cause  
Action  
Copies appear dirty.  
The image density is too  
dark.  
Adjust the image density.  
See P.40 “Adjusting Copy  
Image Density”.  
Auto Image Density is not Select Auto Image Density.  
selected.  
The reverse side of an orig- The image density is too  
inal image is copied. dark.  
Adjust the image density.  
See P.40 “Adjusting Copy  
Image Density”.  
Auto Image Density is not Select Auto Image Density.  
selected.  
A shadow appears on cop- The image density is too  
ies if you use pasted origi- dark.  
nals.  
Adjust the image density.  
See P.40 “Adjusting Copy  
Image Density”.  
5
Change the direction of the  
original.  
Put mending tape on the  
pasted part.  
The same copy area is dirty The exposure glass or doc- Clean them. See P.337  
whenever making copies. ument feeder belt is dirty. “Maintaining Your Ma-  
chine”.  
Copies are too light.  
The image density is too  
light.  
Adjust the image density.  
See P.40 “Adjusting Copy  
Image Density”.  
Damp or rough grain pa-  
per is used.  
Use dry paper without  
rough grain.  
Toner cartridge is almost  
empty.  
Add toner. See P.268 D  
Changing the Toner Bottle”.  
Parts of the image are not The original is not set cor- Set originals correctly. See  
copied.  
rectly.  
An improper paper size is Select the proper paper  
selected. size.  
The original is not set cor- Set originals correctly. See  
rectly.  
P.31 “Setting Originals”.  
Your original has a dot pat- Place the original on the ex-  
Copies are blank.  
A moiré pattern is pro-  
duced on copies.  
tern image or many lines.  
posure glass at a slight an-  
gle.  
R
257  
 
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
If You Cannot Make Copies As You Want  
General  
Problem  
Cause  
Action  
Copies are not stapled.  
There are jammed staples Remove jammed staples.  
in the stapler.  
See P.293 e Removing  
Jammed Staples”.  
Note  
After removing jammed  
staples, staples might  
few times you try to use  
the stapler.  
The number of copies ex-  
ceeds the capacity of the  
stapler.  
Check the stapler capacity.  
See P.60 “Staple”.  
5
Copy paper is curled.  
Turn the copy paper over  
in the tray.  
Staples are wrongly posi-  
tioned.  
Originals are not set cor-  
rectly.  
Set originals correctly. See  
P.60 “Staple”.  
Misfeeds occur frequently. Copy paper size setting is Set the proper paper size.  
not correct.  
See P.282 “Changing the  
Paper Size”.  
You cannot combine sever- Selected functions cannot  
See P.206 “Combination  
Chart”.  
al functions.  
be used together.  
When sorting, the pages  
are divided into two  
blocks.  
The memory became full in You can interrupt the copy-  
the middle of sorting and  
the pages were ejected in  
two blocks.  
ing when the memory be-  
comes full. See “Memory  
Full Auto Scan Restart” in  
P.329 “Input/Output”.  
Connect Copy  
Problem  
Cause  
Action  
Cannot stack, staple or  
punch.  
The optional finisher or  
punch kit is not installed in exit Connect Copy mode,  
the sub-unit.  
Press the [Connect] key to  
then copy using stack/sta-  
ple/punch.  
258  
   
If You Cannot Make Copies As You Want  
Problem  
Cause  
Action  
The copied images differ.  
The “Original Mode Quali- See “Original Mode Quali-  
ty Level” of the User Tools ty Level” in P.310 “Gen-  
eral Features 1/3.  
settings are not the same.  
The installation of the op- Press the [Connect] key to  
tional finisher or booklet  
finisher in both units are  
not the same.  
exit Connect Copy mode,  
then start copying.  
Adjust Image  
Problem  
Cause  
Action  
In Double Copies mode,  
Combination of original  
Select the proper original  
parts of the original image and copy paper is not cor- and copy paper. See ⇒  
are not copied.  
rect.  
P.165 “Double Copies”.  
5
In Border, Center, or Cen- You set the wide erased  
ter/Border mode, parts of margin.  
Set the narrow margin with  
the User Tools. See “Erase  
Border” and “Erase Cen-  
ter” in P.317 “Page For-  
the original image are not  
Your original has narrow  
copied.  
margins on four sides.  
mat 1/2.  
In Margin Adjustment  
mode, parts of the original margin.  
image are not copied.  
You set the wide erased  
the User Tools. See “Front  
Margin: Left/Right” and  
“Back Margin: Left/Right”  
in P.317 “Page Format 1/  
2.  
In Image Repeat mode, the You selected the same size Select copy paper larger  
original image is not cop-  
ied repeatedly.  
copy paper as originals,  
and did not select the prop-  
er reproduction ratio.  
than the originals.  
Select the proper reproduc-  
tion ratio.  
Combine  
Problem  
Cause  
Action  
You cannot make a book  
from a booklet or magazine Format or Combine Origi- P.115 “Combine”.  
Combine Original Booklet Change the setting. See ⇒  
by folding copies.  
nal Magazine Format is not  
correct.  
259  
   
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
Problem  
Cause  
Action  
Parts of the image are not You specified an improper When you specify a repro-  
copied. reproduction ratio that duction ratio using Manual  
does not meet the sizes of Paper Select mode, make  
your originals and copy pa- sure that the ratio matches  
per.  
your originals and the copy  
paper.  
Note  
Select the correct repro-  
duction ratio before us-  
ing Combine mode.  
Your originals are not iden- Use originals that are iden-  
tical in size and direction. tical in size and direction.  
Order of copies is not cor- You set originals in the in- When setting a stack of  
rect.  
correct order.  
originals in the document  
feeder, the last page should  
be on the bottom.  
5
If you set an original on the  
exposure glass, start with  
the first page to be copied.  
Duplex  
Problem  
Cause  
Action  
Order of copies is not cor- You set originals in the in- When setting a stack of  
rect.  
correct order.  
originals in the document  
feeder, the last page should  
be on the bottom.  
If you set an original on the  
exposure glass, start with  
the first page to be copied.  
260  
 
If You Cannot Make Copies As You Want  
Problem  
Cause  
Action  
Orientation of copies (Top You set originals in an in- Select the correct orienta-  
to Top, or Top to Bottom) is correct direction or the ori- tion, or set originals cor-  
not correct.  
entation setting is  
incorrect.  
rectly. See P.111  
“Duplex”.  
Note  
If you set A3, 11" × 17"  
or B4, 81/2" × 14" origi-  
nals as shown below, se-  
lect [Top to Bottom] to  
make copies in “Top to  
Top” orientation. Or se-  
lect [Top to Top] to make  
copies in “Top to Bot-  
tom” orientation.  
5
CP270-A  
Stamp  
Problem  
Cause  
Action  
The wrong date is printed. The machine main power  
has been turned off for  
Set the date correctly again.  
See “Set Date” in the Sys-  
tem Settings manual.  
more than 20 days.  
The stamp position is  
wrong.  
The paper orientation is  
wrong.  
The stamp does not appear. Stamp is too large to print. Check the size of the user  
stamp and register it again.  
See P.189 “Program/De-  
lete User Stamp”.  
When Memory Is Full  
Document Server  
Machine Status  
Action  
The memory is full.  
Delete any unnecessary files and then  
scan the document again. See P.220  
“Deleting Saved Documents”.  
261  
   
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
Connect Copy  
Because Connect Copy scans in all your originals into memory, if the number of  
originals exceeds a certain limit, the machine will run out of memory.  
Limitation  
If memory is full on either the master unit or sub-unit, Interrupt Copy will not  
be available.  
Note  
If you set “Memory Full Auto Scan Restart”of the User Tools to “Yes”, the  
memory overflow message will not be displayed, but make Connect Copy for  
the scanned original automatically. Connect Copy continues scanning and  
copying until finishing the job. Note that copy sets will be printed out sepa-  
rately by scanning at this time.  
Machine Status  
Action  
The memory is full.  
Press the [Output] key to copy scanned  
originals and clear the scanning data.  
Press the [Clear] key to clear the scanning  
data and not copy.  
5
The machine asks you whether you want To continue copying, remove all copies  
to scan the remaining originals.  
then press the [Resume] key. To stop copy-  
ing, press the [Cancel] key.  
262  
 
B
Loading Paper  
B Loading Paper  
Note  
If you want to change the paper size of tray 2 (550-sheet tray), see P.282  
“Changing the Paper Size”.  
Reference  
Regarding paper types and sizes, see P.23 “Copy Paper”.  
Loading Paper in Tray 1 (Tandem Tray)  
R CAUTION:  
Take care not to get your hand caught between the right and left trays.  
5
Important  
When the paper on the right side in tray 1 runs out, the paper on the left side  
will automatically move to the right side. While the paper on the left side is  
moving, the machine instructs you to wait. At this time, do not pull out the  
tray.  
Note  
You can supply paper even while you are making copies using the paper in  
tray 1. During copying, you can pull out the left half of the tray.  
Prepare paper of the same size as that loaded in the right of the tray. Load it  
in the left side in the same direction.  
263  
         
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
A Pull out the paper tray until it stops.  
ZBQY010E  
B Square the paper and set it in the tray.  
When the whole tray is pulled out  
A Set the paper in the right tray.  
5
ZBQY020E  
B Return the right tray into the original position.  
C Set the paper in the left tray.  
ZBQY030E  
Important  
Push the right paper to the right side, and the left paper to the left side.  
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.  
264  
B
Loading Paper  
When the left half of the tray is pulled out  
A Set the paper in the left tray.  
ZBQY030E  
Important  
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.  
5
Make sure that the paper stack is flush with the left side fence.  
Note  
Straighten the paper, if curled or warped, before placing it in the tray.  
C Push the paper tray in until it stops.  
Loading Paper in Tray 2 or 3  
A Pull out the paper tray until it stops.  
ZBQY040E  
265  
   
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
B Square the paper and set it in the tray.  
ZBQY050E  
Important  
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.  
Make sure that the paper stack is flush with the right side fence.  
Note  
5
Straighten the paper, if curled or warped, before placing it in the tray.  
C Gently push the paper tray in until it stops.  
Loading Paper in the Large Capacity Tray  
A Open the top cover.  
ZBQY080E  
266  
   
B
Loading Paper  
B Place the paper in the tray along the edge on the left.  
ZBQY090E  
Note  
Load up to about 500 sheets of paper in the tray.  
C Press the {Down} key.  
The key blinks while the bottom plate is moving down.  
5
ZBQY100E  
D Load paper by repeating steps B and C.  
Note  
The tray can hold up to 3,500 sheets.  
E Close the top cover.  
267  
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
D Changing the Toner Bottle  
When D is displayed, it is time to supply toner.  
R WARNING:  
Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ig-  
nite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of used toner containers  
in accordance with local regulations for plastics.  
R CAUTION:  
Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of children.  
R CAUTION:  
Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function-  
ality, and we recommend that you only use the expendable supplies avail-  
able at an authorized dealer.  
Important  
5
If you use toner other than that recommended, a fault might occur.  
When adding toner, do not turn off the operation switch. If you do, your set-  
tings are cleared.  
Always add toner after the machine instructs you to add toner.  
Do not use used toner. This will damage the machine.  
Note  
You can still make about 1,000 copies after D appears, but replace the toner  
early to prevent poor copy quality.  
Reference  
Regarding toner storage, see P.27 “Toner Storage”.  
• 1: Open the front cover of the machine.  
• 2: Pull out the lever under the toner  
bottle toward you 90°.  
ZBQT010E  
268  
     
D
Changing the Toner Bottle  
• 3: Pull the green lever, and gently pull  
out the toner bottle.  
1
2
ZBQT020E  
• 4: Hold a new bottle horizontally and  
shake it 5 or 6 times.  
5 6  
ZBQT030E  
5
• 5: Remove the outer cap.  
Note  
Do not remove the inner cap.  
ZBQT040E  
• 6: Place the toner bottle in position,  
then push it in until the green lever  
clicks.  
2
1
Note  
If you cannot get it to click in, pull  
out the toner bottle a little, slightly  
rotate it to the right by 10 – 20°, then  
try again.  
ZBQT050E  
• 7: Return the lever under the toner bot-  
tle to its original position.  
• 8: Close the front cover of the machine.  
ZBQT060E  
269  
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
x Clearing Misfeeds  
With 50-Sheet Finisher  
5
ZBQY110E  
With 100-Sheet Finisher  
ZBQY180E  
270  
     
x
Clearing Misfeeds  
With Booklet Finisher  
ZBQY190E  
5
R CAUTION:  
The fusing section of this equipment might be very hot. You should be very  
careful that you don't touch this section when removing the misfed paper.  
Important  
When clearing misfeeds, do not turn off the operation switch. If you do, your  
copy settings are cleared.  
To prevent misfeeds, do not leave any torn scraps of paper within the ma-  
chine.  
If paper misfeeds occur repeatedly, contact your service representative.  
Note  
More than one misfed area may be indicated. In this case, check every appli-  
cable area. See the following charts: A, B, C, D, E1 – E5, P1, P2, U, R (R1 – R6)  
You can find a sticker explaining how to remove misfed paper inside of the  
front cover or inside of the finisher.  
271  
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
5
272  
x
Clearing Misfeeds  
5
ZBQY200E  
273  
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
5
274  
x
Clearing Misfeeds  
When B is lit  
1
2
B2  
B1  
Open the front cover.  
Turn knob B1 and  
Return lever B2 to its  
original position.  
remove misfed paper.  
Close the front cover.  
5
When A is lit  
1
2
2
1
A2  
A1  
Open the front cover.  
Push button A1 and open  
the guide plate.  
Turn knob A2 and  
remove misfed paper.  
Close the front cover.  
ZBQY210E  
275  
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
When R is lit  
50-Sheet Finisher  
When R1,R2 or R3 is lit  
If you cannot remove  
Hold up handle R3 and  
remove misfed paper.  
Close the front cover of the  
machine.  
Open the front cover of  
the machine.  
misfed paper, hold down  
handle R2 and remove  
misfed paper.  
Hold up handle R1 and  
remove misfed paper.  
When R4,R5 or R6 is lit  
5
Pull handle R6 and pull out  
the staple unit, then remove  
misfed paper.  
Close the front cover of the  
machine.  
If you cannot remove  
misfed paper, hold up  
handle R5 and remove  
misfed paper.  
Open the front cover of  
the machine.  
Hold down handle R4  
and remove misfed paper.  
ZBQY220E  
276  
x
Clearing Misfeeds  
When P1 is lit  
1
When P2 is lit  
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
Open the cover of the auto  
Open the cover of the  
auto document feeder  
(ADF).  
Remove misfed originals.  
Close the cover of the  
auto document feeder  
(ADF).  
document feeder (ADF)  
and remove misfed originals.  
Close the cover of the auto  
document feeder (ADF).  
5
When U is lit  
1
Open the top cover and  
remove misfed paper.  
Close the top cover.  
ZBQY230E  
277  
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
100-Sheet Finisher  
5
278  
x
Clearing Misfeeds  
5
ZBQY240E  
279  
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
When R is lit  
Booklet Finisher  
When R1 or R2 is lit  
1
2
2
1
2
3
2
1
1
R2  
R1  
1
2
3
Lift the finisher proof tray, and  
open the upper cover.  
If you can not remove misfed  
paper, hold up lever R1 and  
remove misfed paper.  
4
5
Hold up lever R2 and remove  
misfed paper.  
6
While pushing the release  
lever, remove the finisher.  
Remove misfed paper.  
Remove misfed paper.  
Lower the finisher proof tray,  
and close the upper cover.  
7
8
Return the release lever until it  
clicks, and attach the finisher.  
When R3, R4 or R5 is lit  
1
2
1
1
2
R4  
2
R3  
5
1
While pushing the  
release lever, remove  
the finisher.  
2
Hold up lever R3 and  
remove misfed paper.  
3
If you can not remove  
misfed paper, open the  
lower front cover.  
4
Turn knob R4  
counterclockwise.  
Note  
Depending on the  
location of misfed  
paper, knob R4 might  
not turn.  
1
R5  
2
5
While pushing knob R5,  
turn knob R5 clockwise.  
6
Hold up the lever on the  
upper right of the  
booklet tray, and open  
the cover.  
7
8
Remove misfed paper.  
Close the cover.  
280  
x
Clearing Misfeeds  
5
ZBQY250E  
281  
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
Changing the Paper Size  
Important  
If you wish to change the paper size set in tray 1, tray 3, and the optional large  
capacity tray (LCT), contact your service representative.  
Reference  
For paper sizes, weight, and capacity that can be set in each tray, see P.23  
“Copy Paper”.  
Changing the Paper Size in Tray 2  
A Make sure that the paper tray (tray 2) is not being used. Then fully pull out  
the tray.  
Remove the paper in the tray.  
5
ZBQY140E  
B While pushing the release lever, adjust the side fences and back fence to  
the new paper size.  
ZBQY150E  
282  
         
Changing the Paper Size  
C Square the paper and set it in the tray.  
ZBQY050E  
Important  
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.  
Make sure that the paper stack is flush with the right side fence.  
Note  
5
Straighten the paper, if curled or warped, before placing it in the tray.  
D Set the paper size selector inside the tray to the new paper size.  
ZBQY160N  
To adjust the paper size to one not available with the paper size selector  
A Set the paper size selector knob to the p mark on the left.  
B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
C Press the [System Settings] key.  
D Press the [Paper Size Setting] key.  
E Press the [Tray 2:Paper Size Setting] key.  
F Select your desired size. Then, press the [OK] key.  
G Press the [Exit] key or press the {User Tools/Counter} key to exit the User  
Tools.  
283  
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
Important  
Be sure to select paper size with the User Tools (System Settings). Oth-  
erwise, misfeeds might occur.  
Reference  
For details, see “User Tools (System Settings)” in the System Settings  
manual.  
E Gently push the paper tray until it stops.  
F Check the paper size displayed on the display panel.  
5
284  
d
Adding Staples  
d Adding Staples  
R CAUTION:  
Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function-  
ality, and we recommend that you only use the expendable supplies avail-  
able at an authorized dealer.  
Important  
If you use a staple cartridge other than that recommended, staple failure or  
staple jams might occur.  
Note  
If the optional booklet finisher is installed, initialize the staple unit for the  
Saddle Stitch function with the User Tools (System Settings) after adding sta-  
ples or removing jammed staples. If you do not, misfeeds might occur. See  
“Staple initialization” in the System Settings manual.  
5
50-Sheet Finisher  
• 1: Open the front cover of the finisher.  
• 2: Pull out the staple unit.  
R7  
ZBQP510E  
• 3: Lift the cartridge until it clicks.  
ZBQP520E  
285  
       
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
• 4: Pull out the cartridge gently.  
ZBQP530E  
ZBQP540E  
ZBQP550E  
ZBQP560E  
• 5: Take out the empty refill in the di-  
rection of the arrow.  
5
• 6: Align the arrows on the new refill  
and the cartridge, then push in the re-  
fill until it clicks.  
• 7: Pull out the ribbon.  
286  
d
Adding Staples  
• 8: Reinstall the cartridge.  
ZBQP570E  
• 9: Press down the cartridge until it  
clicks.  
ZBQP580E  
• 10: Bring the staple unit back into  
place.  
5
• 11: Close the front cover of the finisher.  
ZBQP590E  
100-Sheet Finisher  
• 1: Open the front cover of the finisher.  
ZBQP200E  
287  
 
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
• 2: Pull lever R8 down in the staple unit.  
• 3: Turn knob R9 until the staple unit  
rises.  
• 4: Pull out the staple unit lever.  
ZBQP210E  
• 5: Pull out the staple unit gently.  
ZBQP220E  
5
• 6: Put down the staple unit on a level  
surface.  
ZBQP230E  
ZBQP240E  
ZBQP250E  
• 7: Raise the cover up.  
• 8: Set the new refill.  
288  
d
Adding Staples  
• 9: Lower the cover until it clicks.  
ZBQP260E  
ZBQP270E  
ZBQP280E  
ZBQP290E  
ZBQP300E  
• 10: Pull out the ribbon.  
5
• 11: Turn the staple unit around.  
• 12: Reinstall the staple unit.  
• 13: Push the staple unit until it clicks.  
289  
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
• 14: Close the front cover of the finisher.  
ZBQP310E  
Booklet Finisher  
• 1: Open the front cover of the finisher.  
• 2: Pull lever R6 down, then pull out the  
cartridge while lifting the cartridge.  
1
2
R6  
5
ZBQP020E  
• 3: Take out the empty refill in the di-  
rection of the arrow.  
ZBQP030E  
ZBQP040E  
ZBQP050E  
• 4: Set the new refill.  
• 5: Pull out the ribbon.  
290  
 
d
Adding Staples  
• 6: Push the cartridge until it clicks.  
• 7: Close the front cover of the finisher.  
ZBQP060E  
Staple unit for Saddle Stitch function  
• 1: Open the front bottom cover of the  
finisher.  
• 2: Pull lever R7 and fully pull out the  
staple unit.  
1
• 3: While pulling the lever of the staple  
unit, lift the lever of the staple unit.  
5
2
R7  
ZBQP070E  
ZBQP080E  
ZBQP090E  
• 4: Take out the empty cartridge.  
• 5: Set the new cartridge.  
• 6: Bring the staple unit back into place.  
• 7: Close the front bottom cover of the  
finisher.  
To initialize the staple unit with the User Tools (System Settings)  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
B Press the [System Settings] key.  
C Press the [Staple initialization] key on the “Basic Page 2” menu.  
D Press the [OK] key.  
291  
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
The machine staples a few times without ejecting staples.  
E Press the [Exit] key and return to the User Tools Main Menu.  
F Press the [Exit] key and return to Copy mode.  
5
292  
e
Removing Jammed Staples  
e Removing Jammed Staples  
Note  
Staples might be jammed because of curled copies. In this case, try turning the  
copy paper over in the tray. If there is no improvement, change the copy pa-  
per with less curls.  
After removing jammed staples, staples might not be ejected the first few  
times you try to use the stapler.  
If the optional booklet finisher is installed, initialize the staple unit for the  
Saddle Stitch function with the User Tools (System Settings) after adding sta-  
ples or removing jammed staples. If you do not, misfeeds might occur. See  
“Staple initialization” in the System Settings manual.  
50-Sheet Finisher  
5
• 1: Open the front cover of the finisher.  
• 2: Pull out the staple unit.  
R7  
ZBQP610E  
• 3: Lift the cartridge until it clicks.  
ZBQP620E  
293  
       
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
• 4: Pull out the cartridge gently.  
ZBQP630E  
ZBQP640E  
ZBQP650E  
ZBQP660E  
• 5: Open the face plate by pressing the  
lock on the right.  
5
• 6: Remove the jammed staples.  
• 7: Close the face plate by pressing it  
until it clicks.  
294  
e
Removing Jammed Staples  
• 8: Reinstall the cartridge.  
ZBQP670E  
• 9: Press down the cartridge until it  
clicks.  
ZBQP680E  
• 10: Bring the staple unit back into  
place.  
5
• 11: Close the front cover of the finisher.  
ZBQP690E  
100-Sheet Finisher  
• 1: Open the front cover of the finisher  
and pull lever R9 down.  
• 2: Pull lever R8 and fully pull out the  
staple unit.  
ZBQP320E  
295  
 
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
• 3: Turn knob R9 until the marks are  
aligned.  
ZBQP330E  
ZBQP340E  
ZBQP350E  
• 4: Pull out the staple unit lever.  
• 5: Pull out the staple unit gently.  
• 6: Raise the blue lever.  
5
ZBQP360E  
• 7: Push the buttons on the both sides of  
the staple unit and open the face plate.  
ZBQP370E  
296  
e
Removing Jammed Staples  
• 8: Pull out the jammed staples.  
• 9: Lower the face plate until it clicks.  
• 10: Lower the blue lever.  
ZBQP380E  
ZBQP390E  
ZBQP400E  
ZBQP410E  
ZBQP420E  
5
• 11: Reinstall the staple unit.  
• 12: Push the staple unit until it clicks.  
297  
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
• 13: Replace the staple unit.  
• 14: Close the front cover of the finisher.  
ZBQP430E  
Booklet Finisher  
• 1: Open the front cover of the finisher.  
• 2: Pull lever R6 down, then pull out the  
cartridge while lifting the cartridge.  
1
2
R6  
5
ZBQP100E  
• 3: Pull down the knob of the cartridge.  
ZBQP110E  
ZBQP120E  
ZBQP130E  
• 4: Take out all staples slid from the car-  
tridge.  
• 5: Set the knob of the cartridge back  
into place.  
298  
 
e
Removing Jammed Staples  
• 6: Push the cartridge until it clicks.  
• 7: Close the front cover of the finisher.  
ZBQP140E  
Staple unit for Saddle Stitch function  
• 1: Open the front bottom cover of the  
finisher.  
• 2: Pull lever R7 and fully pull out the  
staple unit.  
1
• 3: While pulling the lever of the staple  
unit, lift the lever of the staple unit.  
5
2
R7  
ZBQP150E  
• 4: Take out the cartridge.  
• 5: Pull the blue knob down, then lift  
the knob of the face plate.  
1
2
3
ZBQP160E  
• 6: Remove all jammed staples.  
ZBQP170E  
• 7: Bring the face plate back into place  
by pushing it.  
• 8: Push the cartridge.  
• 9: Bring the staple unit back into place,  
then close the front bottom cover of the  
finisher.  
1
2
ZBQP180E  
299  
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
To initialize the staple unit with the User Tools (System Settings)  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
B Press the [System Settings] key.  
C Press the [Staple initialization] key on the “Basic Page 2” menu.  
D Press the [OK] key.  
The machine staples a few times without ejecting staples.  
E Press the [Exit] key and return to the User Tools Main Menu.  
F Press the [Exit] key and return to Copy mode.  
5
300  
y
Removing Punch Waste  
y Removing Punch Waste  
Note  
While “Hole Punch Receptacle Full.” is displayed, you cannot use the Punch  
function.  
50-Sheet Finisher  
A Open the front cover of the finisher.  
5
ZBQP440E  
B Pull out the punch waste box and remove punch waste.  
ZBQP450E  
C Reinstall the punch waste box.  
ZBQP460E  
301  
       
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
Note  
If you do not, “Hole Punch Receptacle Full.” is still displayed.  
D Close the front cover of the finisher.  
“Hole Punch Receptacle Full.” disappears.  
Note  
If the message is still displayed, reinstall the punch waste box.  
100-Sheet Finisher  
A Open the front cover of the finisher.  
5
ZBQP470E  
B Pull out the punch waste box and remove punch waste.  
ZBQP480E  
302  
 
y
Removing Punch Waste  
C Reinstall the punch waste box.  
ZBQP490E  
Note  
If you do not, “Hole Punch Receptacle Full.” is still displayed.  
D Close the front cover of the finisher.  
“Hole Punch Receptacle Full.” disappears.  
5
Note  
If the message is still displayed, reinstall the punch waste box.  
303  
What to Do If Something Goes Wrong  
5
304  
6. User Tools (Copy/  
Document Server Features)  
Accessing the User Tools (Copy/  
Document Server Features)  
This section is for the key operators in charge of this machine. You can change  
or set the machine's default settings.  
Preparation  
After using the User Tools, be sure to exit from the User Tools.  
The selected key is highlighted.  
Any changes you make with the User Tools remain in effect even if the main  
power switch or operation switch is turned off, or the {Clear Modes/Energy Sav-  
er} key is pressed.  
Reference  
For details, see “Accessing the User Tools (System Settings)” in the System  
Settings manual.  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The User Tools Main Menu appears.  
Screen  
User Tools/  
Counter  
Contrast  
TSPS040N  
B Press the [Copy/Document Server Features] key.  
The Copy/Document Server Features menu appears.  
305  
       
User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)  
C Select the desired menu and press the key.  
Note  
[UPrev.]: Press to go back to the previous page.  
Reference  
P.308 “User Tools Menu (Copy/Document Server Features)”.  
Then press the [OK] key.  
Reference  
6
P.310 “Settings You Can Change with the User Tools”.  
Note  
[OK]: Press to set the new settings and return to the previous menu.  
[Cancel]: Press to return to the previous menu without changing any data.  
Exiting From the User Tools  
A After changing the User Tools settings, press the [Exit] key on the User  
Tools Main Menu.  
Changing the User Tools is completed, and the machine is ready for copying.  
Note  
To exit from the change of the machine's default settings and return to  
Copy mode, press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
You can also exit from the User Tools by pressing the {User Tools/Counter}  
key.  
306  
 
Accessing the User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)  
6
This page is intentionally blank.  
307  
User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)  
User Tools Menu (Copy/Document Server Features)  
General Features  
Prev. Key  
Next Key  
Page Format  
6
Prev. Key  
Next Key  
Prev. Key  
Next Key  
Page Numbering  
Reproduction Ratio  
Prev. Key  
Prev. Key  
Next Key  
Date Dtamp  
308  
   
User Tools Menu (Copy/Document Server Features)  
Count Manager  
Input / Output  
Stamp Setting  
Background Numbering  
6
Preset Stamp  
Prev. Key  
Next Key  
Next Key  
User Stamp  
Prev. Key  
Next Key  
309  
ZBQS130E  
User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)  
Settings You Can Change with the User  
Tools  
Reference  
For how to access the User Tools, see P.305 “Accessing the User Tools (Copy/  
Document Server Features)”.  
General Features 1/3  
Menu  
Description  
Auto Paper Select  
Priority  
As a default setting, Auto Paper Select is selected. You can can-  
cel this setting.  
Note  
Default: Yes  
Auto Paper Select  
Tray Display  
You can choose whether the available paper trays/sizes are  
shown on the initial display.  
6
Note  
Default: Display  
If you choose “Hide”, the display is shown as below. When  
the [Auto Paper Select] key is pressed, paper sizes appear on  
the display.  
Auto Image Density As a default setting, Auto Image Density is selected. You can  
Priority  
change this setting.  
Note  
Default: Yes  
Original Mode Pri- As a default setting, Text is selected as the Originals Type. You  
ority  
can change it to Text·Photo, Photo, Pale, or Generation.  
Note  
Default: Text  
310  
       
Settings You Can Change with the User Tools  
Menu  
Description  
Original Mode Dis- You can choose whether the original modes are shown on the  
play  
initial display.  
Note  
Default: No  
If you choose “Yes”, the display is shown as below.  
Original Mode Quality Level  
You can adjust the quality level of copies for each of the original types (Text, Text·Pho-  
to, Photo, Pale, Generation).  
6
Text  
Adjust the sharpness of text.  
Note  
Default: Normal  
[SP Mode Changed] is the value set during service setup.  
Choosing [Sharp] or [Soft] affects the outline sharpness of  
text.  
Text·Photo  
When there are photo(s) and text on the original, determine  
whether the photo or text takes priority.  
Note  
Default: Normal  
[SP Mode Changed] is the value set during service setup.  
[Normal] achieves a good balance between text and photos.  
311  
User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)  
Menu  
Description  
Photo  
For a photo original, adjust the finish quality level to match the  
type of photo original.  
Note  
Default: Screened Printed  
[SP Mode Changed] is the value set during service setup.  
Select [Screened Printed] for printed photo originals, and [Con-  
tinuous Tone] for printed photo originals with fine dots.  
Select [Normal] for printed photo and text originals.  
Pale  
Adjust the quality level for the finish of a pale original with nor-  
mal density.  
Note  
Default: Normal  
[SP Mode Changed] is the value set during service setup.  
Generation  
Adjust the quality level so as not to thicken the lines of the finish  
image.  
Note  
Default: Normal  
6
[SP Mode Changed] is the value set during service setup.  
Original Image  
Density Level  
You can select one of seven original image density levels for  
each of the original types (Text, Text·Photo, Photo, Pale, Gener-  
ation).  
Note  
Default: Normal  
Auto Reset Timer  
The machine returns to its initial condition automatically after  
your job is finished. The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds,  
or 0.  
Note  
Default: 60sec.  
To turn “Auto Reset Timer” off, input “0”.  
Note that when “Auto Reset Timer” is turned off, the ma-  
chine will not return to the user code input window auto-  
matically.  
312  
Settings You Can Change with the User Tools  
General Features 2/3  
Menu  
Description  
Duplex Mode Prior- You can select the type of the Duplex function effective when  
ity  
the machine is turned on, Energy Saver mode is off, or Auto Re-  
set is on.  
Note  
Default:  
• Metric version: 1 Sided1 Sided  
• Inch version: 1 Sided2 Sided  
Copy Orientation in You can set the copy orientation when making two-sided cop-  
Duplex Mode  
ies.  
Note  
Default: Top to Top  
Original Orienta-  
tion in Duplex  
Mode  
You can set the original orientation when making two-sided  
copies.  
6
Note  
Default: Top to Top  
Initial Mode  
You can select the initial mode or Program No. 10 as the mode  
effective when the machine is turned on, or modes are cleared.  
Note  
Default: Normal  
Maximum Copy  
Quantity  
The maximum copy quantity can be set between 1 and 999.  
Note  
Default: 999Cop.  
Original Beeper  
The beeper (key tone) sounds when you forgot to remove orig-  
inals after copying.  
Note  
Default: On  
If the “Operation Panel Beeper” of the User Tools (System  
Settings) setting is “Off”, the beeper does not sound irrespec-  
tive of the “Original Beeper” setting. See “Operation Panel  
Beeper” in the System Settings manual.  
313  
 
User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)  
Menu  
Description  
Job End Call  
You can choose whether or not the beeper sounds when copy-  
ing is complete, when copying is interrupted, when the paper  
tray runs out of paper, or when there is a paper jam.  
Note  
Default: On  
When the “Auto Response (Human) Sensor” of the User  
Tools (System Settings) setting is set to “Yes” and the ma-  
chine senses that there is a person present, it judges that  
copying operations are not complete and the beeper does not  
sound. See “Auto Response (Human) Sensor” in the System  
Settings manual.  
If the “Operation Panel Beeper” of the User Tools (System  
Settings) setting is “Off”, the beeper does not sound irrespec-  
tive of the “Job End Call” setting. See “Operation Panel  
Beeper” in the System Settings manual.  
Time for indicating The machine returns to its initial condition automatically from  
job status  
the Job List display. The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds,  
or 0.  
6
Note  
Default: 15sec.  
To turn “Time for indicating job status” off, input “0”.  
General Features 3/3  
Menu  
Description  
Shortcut Keys:F1  
Shortcut Keys:F2  
Shortcut Keys:F3  
Shortcut Keys:F4  
Shortcut Keys:F5  
You can register frequently used functions in Shortcut Keys F1  
to F5. You can also change the registered functions. See P.10  
“Display Panel”.  
Note  
Default:  
• Shortcut Keys:F1: 1 Sided2 Sided:T to T  
• Shortcut Keys:F2: 2 Sided:T to T2 Sided:T to T  
• Shortcut Keys:F3: 1 Sided1 Sided Combine:2 Originals  
• Shortcut Keys:F4: 1 Sided1 Sided Combine:4 Originals  
• Shortcut Keys:F5: Shrink&Center  
By using the Copy Face Up function, you can have copies de-  
livered in reverse order specified by “Face-Up/Down Selec-  
tion in Platen Mode” of the User Tools. However, you cannot  
combine the Copy Face Up function with the Staple/Punch  
function. If you select the bypass tray in which tab stocks are  
loaded, the “Copy Face Up” setting is ignored.  
314  
 
Settings You Can Change with the User Tools  
Reproduction Ratio 1/2  
Menu  
Description  
Shortcut R/E  
You can register up to three frequently used Reduce/Enlarge  
ratios other than the fixed Reduce/Enlarge ratio and have them  
shown on the initial display. You can also change the registered  
Reduce/Enlarge ratios.  
If no Reduce/Enlarge ratio has been set when selecting [User Ra-  
tio 1], [User Ratio 2], or [User Ratio 3], enter the desired Reduce/  
Enlarge ratio using the number keys.  
R/E Priority  
Specify which Reduce, Enlarge or Input Ratio is shown on the  
display panel with priority when the [Reduce/Enlarge] key is  
pressed.  
Note  
Default: Reduce  
Enlarge 1  
Enlarge 2  
Enlarge 3  
Enlarge 4  
Enlarge 5  
You can customize the enlargement ratios available when you  
press the [Reduce/Enlarge] key followed by the [Enlarge] key.  
Note  
Default:  
6
• Metric version:  
• Enlarge 1: 115%  
• Enlarge 2: 122%  
• Enlarge 3: 141%  
• Enlarge 4: 200%  
• Enlarge 5: 400%  
• Inch version:  
• Enlarge 1: 121%  
• Enlarge 2: 129%  
• Enlarge 3: 155%  
• Enlarge 4: 200%  
• Enlarge 5: 400%  
When selecting [User Set. Ratio], enter a ratio using the num-  
ber keys (in the range of 101 to 400%).  
315  
 
User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)  
Menu  
Description  
Priority Setting : En- You can set the ratio with priority when the [Reduce/Enlarge] key  
large  
is pressed, followed by the [Enlarge] key.  
Note  
Default:  
• Metric version: 141%  
• Inch version: 155%  
Reproduction Ratio 2/2  
Menu  
Description  
Reduce 1  
Reduce 2  
Reduce 3  
Reduce 4  
Reduce 5  
Reduce 6  
You can customize the reduction ratios available when you  
press the [Reduce/Enlarge] key followed by the [Reduce] key.  
Note  
Default:  
• Metric version:  
• Reduce 1: 50%  
• Reduce 2: 65%  
• Reduce 3: 71%  
• Reduce 4: 75%  
• Reduce 5: 82%  
• Reduce 6: 93%  
• Inch version:  
• Reduce 1: 50%  
• Reduce 2: 65%  
• Reduce 3: 73%  
• Reduce 4: 78%  
• Reduce 5: 85%  
• Reduce 6: 93%  
6
When selecting [User Reduc.Ratio], enter a ratio using the  
number keys (in the range of 25 to 99%).  
Priority Setting : Re- You can set the ratio with priority when the [Reduce/Enlarge] key  
duce  
is pressed, followed by the [Reduce] key.  
Note  
Default:  
• Metric version: 75%  
• Inch version: 78%  
316  
 
Settings You Can Change with the User Tools  
Menu  
Description  
Shrink&Center Ra- You can set a Reduce/Enlarge ratio when registering  
tio  
“Shrink&Center” in a Shortcut Key.  
Note  
Default: 93%  
Page Format 1/2  
Menu  
Description  
Front Margin: Left/ You can specify left and right margins on the front side of copies  
Right  
in Margin Adjust mode.  
Note  
Default:  
• Metric version: Left 5mm  
• Inch version: Left 0.2"  
Back Margin: Left/ You can specify left and right margins on the back side of copies  
Right  
in Margin Adjust mode.  
6
Note  
Default:  
• Metric version: Right 5mm  
• Inch version: Right 0.2"  
Front Margin: Top/ You can specify front top and bottom margins on the front side  
Bottom  
of copies in Margin Adjust mode.  
Note  
Default:  
• Metric version: Bottom 0mm  
• Inch version: Bottom 0.0"  
Back Margin: Top/ You can specify back top and bottom margins on the front side  
Bottom  
of copies in Margin Adjust mode.  
Note  
Default:  
• Metric version: Bottom 0mm  
• Inch version: Bottom 0.0"  
317  
 
User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)  
Menu  
Description  
1 2 Duplex Auto In 1 sided 2 sided Duplex mode, you can specify whether to  
Margin Adjust  
automatically set the margins on the back side.  
The margin is set to the same value of “Back Margin: Left/  
Right”.  
Note  
Default: Yes  
Erase Border  
The default setting of the width of the erased margins in Erase  
Border mode can be changed as follows:  
• Metric version: 3 – 50mm in 1mm steps  
• Inch version: 0.1" – 2.0" in 0.1" steps  
Note  
Default:  
• Metric version: 10mm  
• Inch version: 0.4"  
Combine Orig.  
Shadow Erase  
In Combine Copy or Booklet/Magazine Copy mode, you can  
specify whether to erase a 3mm, 0.1" bounding margin around  
all four edges of each original.  
6
Note  
Default: On  
Erase Center  
The default setting of the width of the erased margins in Erase  
Center mode can be changed as follows:  
• Metric version: 3 – 50mm in 1mm steps  
• Inch version: 0.1" – 2.0" in 0.1" steps  
Note  
Default:  
• Metric version: 10mm  
• Inch version: 0.4"  
318  
Settings You Can Change with the User Tools  
Menu  
Description  
Repeat Separation  
Line  
You can select a separation line in Image Repeat mode from no  
line, Solid line, Broken line 1, Broken line 2, or Crop.  
• None  
• Solid  
• Broken 1  
• Broken 2  
• Crop  
6
Note  
Default: None  
319  
User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)  
Page Format 2/2  
Menu  
Description  
Double Copies Sep- You can select a separation line in Double Copy mode from no  
aration Line  
line, Solid line, Broken line, or Crop.  
• None  
• Solid  
• Broken  
• Crop Marks  
6
Note  
Default: None  
320  
 
Settings You Can Change with the User Tools  
Menu  
Description  
Combine Separa-  
tion Line  
You can select a separation line in Combine mode from no line,  
Solid line, Broken line 1, Broken line 2, or Crop.  
• None  
• Solid  
• Broken 1  
• Broken 2  
• Crop  
6
Note  
Default: None  
Copy Back Cover  
When copying the back cover, you can specify whether to issue  
the back cover outside (outside page) or inside (inside page).  
Note  
Default: Outside (Reverse)  
Cover page in com- You can specify whether to make a combined copy on the front  
bine mode  
cover sheet when you select [Copy] in Front Cover mode.  
Note  
Default: Combine  
Designated Slip  
You can specify whether to make a combined copy on the in-  
Sheet Copy In Com- serted slip sheets in Designate: Copy mode.  
bine  
Note  
Default: Combine  
321  
User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)  
Menu  
Description  
Booklet/Magazine You can select the type of originals for Booklet or Magazine  
Original Orienta-  
tion  
mode.  
Note  
Default: Portrait  
Copy Order In  
Combine Mode  
You can set the copy order in Combine mode to “Left to Right”  
or “Top to Bottom”.  
6
Note  
Default: Left to Right  
322  
Settings You Can Change with the User Tools  
Stamp Setting  
Background Numbering  
Menu  
Description  
Size  
You can set the size of the numbers.  
Note  
Default: Normal  
• Small: About 8 × 4mm, 0.32" × 0.16"  
• Normal: About 32 × 16mm, 1.28" × 0.64"  
• Large: About 64 × 32mm, 2.56" × 1.28"  
Density  
You can set the density of the numbers.  
Note  
Default: Normal  
Superimpose  
You can select whether the numbering is printed negative  
when it overlaps black parts of the image.  
6
Note  
Default: Off  
Preset Stamp  
Menu  
Description  
Stamp Priority  
You can select the stamp type priority detected in Stamp  
mode.  
Note  
Default: COPY  
Stamp Language  
You can select the language of the message that is printed  
in Stamp mode.  
Note  
Default: English  
323  
     
User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)  
Menu  
Description  
Stamp position  
You can set the position at which the stamp is printed.  
Press the arrow keys to adjust the position.  
Note  
Default:  
• Metric Version:  
• Position: Top Right  
• Top/Bottom Margin: 24mm  
• Left/Right Margin: 24mm  
• Inch Version:  
• Position: Top Right  
• Top/Bottom Margin: 0.9"  
• Left/Right Margin: 0.9"  
Stamp condition  
You can adjust the size, density and print page for the stamp.  
Size  
You can set the size of the stamp.  
6
Note  
Default: 1X  
Density  
You can set the pattern used to print the stamp.  
Note  
Default: Normal  
Normal: The stamp is printed on the image. You cannot  
confirm which parts overlap the image.  
Lighter: The image can be seen through the stamp.  
Light: You can see the image even clearer than in the  
“Lighter” setting.  
Print Page  
You can select whether the stamp is printed on the first  
page or all pages.  
Note  
Default: All Pages  
Superimpose  
You can select whether the Preset Stamp is printed negative  
when it overlaps black parts of the image.  
Note  
Default: Off  
324  
Settings You Can Change with the User Tools  
User Stamp  
Menu  
Description  
Program/Delete Stamp  
You can register up to 4 custom stamps with your favorite design. You can register/  
change/delete your favorite design as a user stamp.  
How to Program/Delete Stamp, see P.189 “Program/Delete User Stamp”.  
Stamp position  
You can set the position at which the stamp is printed.  
Press the arrow keys to adjust the position.  
Note  
Default:  
• Metric version:  
• Position: Top Right  
• Top/Bottom Margin: 24mm  
• Left/Right Margin: 24mm  
• Inch version:  
• Position: Top Right  
6
• Top/Bottom Margin: 0.9"  
• Left/Right Margin: 0.9"  
Stamp condition  
You can adjust the print page for User Stamp 1 to 4 you registered.  
Print Page  
You can select whether the stamp is printed on the first  
page or all pages.  
Note  
Default: All Pages  
Date Stamp  
Menu  
Description  
Format  
You can select the date format for Date Stamp mode.  
Note  
Default:  
• Metric version: DD/MM/YYYY  
• Inch version: MM/DD/YYYY  
325  
   
User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)  
Menu  
Description  
Font  
You can select the Date Stamp font.  
Note  
Default: Font 1  
This setting is linked with Page Numbering.  
Position Priority  
You can set the position at which the stamp is printed.  
Press the arrow keys to adjust the position.  
Note  
Default:  
• Metric version:  
• Position: Top Left  
• Top/Bottom Margin: 8mm  
• Left/Right Margin: 32mm  
• Inch version:  
• Position: Top Left  
• Top/Bottom Margin: 0.3"  
• Left/Right Margin: 0.8"  
6
Size  
You can set the Date Stamp size.  
Note  
Default: Auto Select  
This setting is linked with Page Numbering.  
Superimpose  
You can select whether the Date Stamp is printed negative  
when it overlaps black parts of the image.  
Note  
Default: Off  
This setting is linked with Page Numbering.  
Page Numbering  
Menu  
Description  
Format Priority  
You can select the page number format priority detected in  
Page Numbering mode.  
Note  
Default: P1, P2  
326  
 
Settings You Can Change with the User Tools  
Menu  
Description  
Font  
You can select the font of the page number that is printed in  
Page Numbering mode.  
Note  
Default: Font 1  
This setting is linked with Date Stamp.  
Size  
You can set the size of the stamp that is printed in Page  
Numbering mode.  
Note  
Default: Auto Select  
This setting is linked with Date Stamp.  
Duplex Back Page  
Number Position  
You can set the position of the duplex back page number  
that is printed in Duplex mode.  
Note  
Default: Opposite Position  
Page Numbering In  
Combine Mode  
You can set how the pages are numbered when you use the  
Combine function and Page Numbering function together.  
6
Note  
Default: Per Original  
Copy On Slip Sheet In You can select whether to print the page number onto slip  
Designate Mode  
sheets when you use the Designate function set to “Copy”  
and Page Numbering function together.  
Note  
Default: Don't copy  
Position Priority: P1,  
P2...  
You can set the position at which the stamp is printed.  
Press the arrow keys to adjust the position.  
Position Priority: 1/5,  
2/5...  
Note  
Default:  
Position Priority: -1-, -2-  
...  
• Metric version:  
• Position: P1, 1/5, P.1, 1:Top Right, -1-, 1-1: Bottom  
Position Priority: P.1,  
P.2...  
Center  
• Top/Bottom Margin: P1, 1/5, P.1, 1:12mm, -1-, 1-1:  
Position Priority: 1, 2...  
8mm  
Position Priority: 1-1, 1-  
2...  
• Left/Right Margin: P1, 1/5, P.1, 1:12mm, -1-, 1-1:  
0mm  
• Inch version:  
• Position: P1, 1/5, P.1, 1:Top Right, -1-, 1-1: Bottom  
Center  
• Top/Bottom Margin: P1, 1/5, P.1, 1:0.5", -1-, 1-1: 0.3"  
327  
• Left/Right Margin: P1, 1/5, P.1, 1:0.5", -1-, 1-1: 0.0"  
User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)  
Menu  
Description  
Superimpose  
You can select whether page numbers are printed negative  
when they overlap black parts of the image.  
Note  
Default: Off  
This setting is linked with Date Stamp.  
6
328  
Settings You Can Change with the User Tools  
Input/Output  
Menu  
Description  
Batch (SADF) Auto Re- When you set one original at a time in the document feeder,  
set Time  
the Auto Feed indicator lights for a selected time after an  
original is fed to show that the document feeder is ready for  
another original. You can adjust this time from 3 seconds to  
99.  
Note  
Default: 10sec.  
ARDF Original Table  
Rise Time  
You can set the document feeder original table rise time.  
Note  
Default: When Original is Set  
Face-Up/Down Selec- When copying an original placed on the exposure glass or  
tion in Platen Mode  
loaded in the document feeder, you can specify which way  
it is ejected.  
Note  
6
Default: Face Up Exit  
Rotate Sort Auto Paper You can specify whether to continue copying when the pa-  
Continue  
per of the required orientation has run out during rotate-  
sorting. See “Rotate Sort” in P.55 “Sort”.  
• If you select [No]:  
When paper of the required orientation runs out, the  
machine stops copying and prompts you to supply copy  
paper. When you load paper, the machine will continue  
copying.  
• If you select [Yes]:  
Copying continues using copy paper of a different direc-  
tion. The copy job will finish even if you have left the  
machine.  
Note  
Default: No  
329  
 
User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)  
Menu  
Description  
Auto Sort Mode  
You can specify whether Sort mode is selected when the  
machine is turned on or the mode is cleared.  
Note  
Default: No  
Memory Full Auto Scan When the memory becomes full while scanning originals,  
Restart  
the machine can make copies of the scanned originals first,  
then automatically proceed scanning the remaining origi-  
nals.  
You can enable or disable this function.  
• If you select [Yes]:  
When the memory becomes full, the machine stops op-  
eration allowing you to remove the copy pages deliv-  
ered on the output tray.  
• If you select [No]:  
You can leave the machine unattended to make all the  
copies, but the resulting sorted pages will not be sequen-  
tial.  
Note  
Default: No  
6
Select Stack or Rotate  
sort  
Specify which Stack or Rotate Sort is shown on the initial  
display with priority.  
Note  
Default: Stack  
The optional finisher or booklet finisher is required to  
use this function.  
Staple Position  
Specify which Top 2 staples or Bottom is shown on the ini-  
tial display with priority.  
Note  
Default: Top 2 staples  
The optional finisher or booklet finisher is required to  
use this function.  
Paper Eject: Always Ro- If you want to copy on the paper with letterhead, the ma-  
tate 180°  
chine rotates the image correctly. To use this function, select  
“Yes”.  
Note  
Default: No  
330  
Settings You Can Change with the User Tools  
Count Manager  
When a key operator code has already been entered, you cannot begin manager  
settings unless you enter the key operator code (up to 8 digits).  
Menu  
Description  
Check/Reset/Print Copy Counter  
You can check or print the number of copies made under each user code. You can also  
reset each user code's counter to 0.  
If more than 10 user codes are registered, you can view all the counters using the [UP-  
rev.] or [TNext] key.  
Print  
You can print the copied quantity of the counter for each  
user code.  
To start the printing, press the {Start} key.  
To stop the printing, press the [Cancel] key.  
Reset Counter  
Reset All  
You can reset each user code's counter to 0.  
You can reset all counters to 0.  
User Code Register/Change/Delete  
6
You can register, change, or delete the user codes (8 digits or less).  
Note  
Up to 500 user codes can be registered.  
Even if you have changed the user code, the counter value will not be cleared.  
When the user code is deleted, the counter value will be automatically deleted.  
Register  
Change  
You can register the user codes.  
You can change the user codes.  
Note  
The number of copies made under the old code is added  
to that made under the new user code.  
Delete User Code  
You can delete the user codes.  
Delete All User Codes You can delete all the user codes.  
331  
 
User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)  
Menu  
Description  
Face-Up/Down Selec- You can set whether copies are delivered face up or face  
tion in Bypass Mode  
down when making copies from the bypass tray.  
Limitation  
Only use “Face Down Exit” when copying onto stan-  
dard high quality paper with a weight of 52 – 105g/m2  
(14 – 28 lb. Bond).  
When you select “OHP” or “Thick Paper”, copy paper is  
delivered face up even if you have set the “Face-Up/  
Down Selection in Bypass Mode” setting to “Face Down  
Exit”.  
Note  
Default: Face Up Exit  
Connect Copy Master  
You can select whether the [Connect]key is displayed or not.  
If you choose “No”, the [Connect] key will not be displayed  
and this unit cannot become the master unit. As a default  
setting, “Yes” is selected. You can cancel this setting.  
Note  
Default : Yes  
6
Auto File Delete  
Old files stored on the Document Server can be deleted au-  
tomatically. The time can be set from 1 to 180 days, or 0.  
Note  
Default: 1 Days  
To turn “Auto File Delete” off, input “0”.  
Delete All The Saved  
Files  
You can delete all the saved documents by pressing the [De-  
lete All The Saved Files] key, and the [Yes] key in the confirma-  
tion dialog box.  
Note  
All the documents including those with a password are  
deleted.  
332  
7. REMARKS  
Do's And Don'ts  
R CAUTION:  
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the equipment.  
While moving the equipment, you should take care that the power cord will  
not be damaged under the equipment.  
• When you use this equipment for a long time in a confined space without  
good ventilation, you may detect an odd smell. To keep the workplace com-  
fortable, we recommend you keep it well ventilated.  
• Do not press areas on or around the fusing unit. These areas get hot.  
• After making copies continuously, the exposure glass may feel warm—this is  
not a malfunction.  
• You might feel warm around the ventilation hole. This is caused by exhaust  
air, and is not a malfunction.  
• Do not turn off the operation switch while copying or printing. Make sure  
that all copying or printing has finished.  
• The machine might fail to produce good copy images if condensation forms  
inside the machine due to rapid temperature change. To prevent this prob-  
lem, the machine has an anti-condensation function. Even after the main  
power switch is in the stand-by position, the anti-condensation heater is ac-  
tive, thus keeping the machine body slightly warm.  
• Do not open the covers of machine while copying or printing. If you do, mis-  
feeds might occur.  
• Do not move the machine while copying or printing.  
• If you operate the machine improperly or a failure occurs on the machine,  
your machine settings might be lost. Be sure to take a note of your machine  
settings.  
• Supplier shall not be liable for any loss or damages resulting from a failure on  
the machine, loss of machine settings, and use of the machine.  
• Depending on the operating conditions (e.g., low temperature, input volt-  
age), the copying speed might be reduced to produce a good copy image.  
333  
       
REMARKS  
Where to Put Your Machine  
Machine Environment  
Your machine's location should be carefully chosen because environmental con-  
ditions greatly affect its performance.  
Optimum environmental conditions  
R CAUTION:  
Keep the equipment away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an  
electric shock might occur.  
Do not place the equipment on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples  
over, it could cause injury.  
R CAUTION:  
If you use the equipment in a confined space, make sure there is a continu-  
ous air turnover.  
• Temperature: 10 – 32°C (50 – 89.6°F)(humidity to be 54% at 32°C, 89.6°F)  
• Humidity: 15 – 80% (temperature to be 27°C, 80.6°F at 80%)  
• A strong and level base.  
7
• The machine must be level within 5mm, 0.2" both front to rear and left to  
right.  
• To avoid possible buildup of ozone, be sure to locate this machine in a large  
well ventilated room that has an air turnover of more than 30 m3/hr/person.  
Environments to avoid  
• Locations exposed to direct sunlight or strong light (more than 1,500 lux).  
• Locations directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner or heated air  
from a heater. (Sudden temperature changes might cause condensation with-  
in the machine.)  
• Locations close to such machines generating ammonia as diazo copy ma-  
chine.  
• Places where the machine might be subjected to frequent strong vibration.  
• Dusty areas.  
• Areas with corrosive gases.  
334  
     
Where to Put Your Machine  
Power Connection  
R WARNING:  
Only connect the machine to the power source described on the inside  
front cover of this manual. Connect the power cord directly into a wall  
outlet and do not use an extention cord.  
Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord.  
Do not place heavy objects on it. Do not pull it hard nor bend it more  
than necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or fire.  
R CAUTION:  
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the equipment.  
While moving the equipment, you should take care that the power cord will  
not be damaged under the equipment.  
R CAUTION:  
When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the  
plug (not the cable).  
• When the main switch is in the Stand-by positions, the optional anti-conden-  
sation heaters are on. In case of emergency, unplug the machine's power cord.  
• When you unplug the power cord, the anti-condensation heaters turn off.  
• Make sure that the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.  
• Voltage must not fluctuate more than 10%.  
7
• The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily ac-  
cessible.  
335  
   
REMARKS  
Access to the Machine  
Place the machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown.  
1
4
2
3
TSPS060E  
1. Rear: more than 3 cm (1.2")  
2. Right: more than 4 cm (1.6")  
3. Front: more than 70 cm (27.6")  
4. Left: more than 10 cm (4.0")  
Note  
For the required space when options are installed, contact your service repre-  
7
sentative.  
336  
   
Maintaining Your Machine  
Maintaining Your Machine  
If the exposure glass or document feeder belt is dirty, you might not be able to  
make copies as you want. Clean them if you find them dirty.  
Cleaning the machine  
Wipe the machine with a soft, damp cloth. Then, wipe it with a dry cloth to  
remove the water.  
Important  
Do not use chemical cleaner or organic solvent, such as thinner or benzene. If  
they get into the machine or melt plastic parts, a failure might occur.  
Do not clean parts other than those specified in this manual. Such parts  
should be cleaned by your service representative.  
Cleaning the Exposure Glass  
7
ND1C0200  
Cleaning the Document Feeder  
A1P0100E  
337  
           
REMARKS  
7
338  
8. Specification  
Mainframe  
Configuration:  
Console  
Photosensitivity type:  
OPC drum (Φ100)  
Original scanning:  
One-dimensional solid scanning system through CCD  
Copy process:  
Dry electrostatic transfer system  
Development:  
Dry two-component magnetic brush development system  
Fusing:  
Heating roll pressure system  
Resolution:  
600 dpi  
Exposure glass:  
Stationary original exposure type  
Original reference position:  
Rear left corner  
Warm-up time:  
Less than 330 seconds (23°C)  
Originals:  
Sheet/book/objects  
Maximum original size:  
A3L, 11" × 17"L  
Copy paper size:  
• Trays: A3L – A5L, 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"L  
• Bypass: A3L – A6L, 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"L  
• Bypass (non-standard size):  
Vertical: 100 – 300mm, 4.0" – 11.7"  
Horizontal: 140 – 432mm, 5.6" – 17.0"  
339  
       
Specification  
• Duplex: A3L – A5L, 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"L (impossible on A5K,  
51/2" × 81/2" K)  
• LCT: A4K, B5K, 81/2" × 14"K *1 , 81/2" × 11"K  
*1  
The optional 81/2" × 14" paper size tray is required to set this size of paper.  
Copy paper weight:  
• Paper tray: 52 – 128g/m2, 14 – 34 lb. Bond  
• Bypass tray: 52 – 157g/m2, 14 lb. Bond – 90 lb. Index  
52 – 200g/m2, 14 lb. Bond – 110 lb. Index  
(When the optional 100 sheet finisher is installed.)  
Non-reproduction area:  
• Leading edge: Less than 3 ± 2mm  
• Trailing edge: More than 1mm  
• Left edge: More than 2 ± 1.5mm  
• Right edge: More than 0.5mm  
First copy time:  
• 3.5 seconds or less  
(face up feed, A4K, 81/2" × 11"K, 100%, feeding from tray 1, on the expo-  
sure glass, Text·Photo mode, Auto Image Density)  
• 5.3 seconds or less  
(face down feed, A4K, 81/2" × 11"K, 100%, feeding from tray 1, on the ex-  
posure glass, Text·Photo mode, Auto Image Density)  
Copying speed: (Type 1)  
8
• 28 copies/minute (A3L, 11" × 17"L)  
• 55 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)  
Copying speed: (Type 2)  
• 36 copies/minute (A3L, 11" × 17"L)  
• 70 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)  
Reproduction ratio:  
Preset reproduction ratios:  
Metric version  
Inch version  
400%  
Enlargement  
400%  
200%  
200%  
141%  
155%  
122%  
129%  
115%  
121%  
Full Size  
100%  
100%  
340  
 
Mainframe  
Reduction  
93%  
82%  
75%  
71%  
65%  
50%  
93%  
85%  
78%  
73%  
65%  
50%  
Zoom: From 25 to 400% in 1% steps.  
Maximum continuous copy run:  
999 sets  
Copy paper capacity:  
• Tray 1 (Tandem tray) : 3,100 sheets (1,550 sheets × 2) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• Tray 2 (550-sheet tray) : 550 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• Tray 3 (550-sheet tray) : 550 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• Bypass tray: 50 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
Power consumption:  
• Mainframe only  
Type 1  
Type 2  
Warm-up  
about 1.29 kw  
about 0.25 kw  
about 1.6 kw  
less than 1.75 kw  
about 1.29 kw  
about 0.25 kw  
about 1.6 kw  
less than 1.75 kw  
Stand-by  
8
During printing  
Maximum  
• Complete system *1  
Type 1  
Type 2  
Warm-up  
Stand-by  
During printing  
Maximum  
*1  
about 1.29 kw  
about 0.26 kw  
about 1.6 kw  
less than 1.75 kw  
about 1.29 kw  
about 0.26 kw  
about 1.6 kw  
less than 1.75 kw  
The Complete System consists of the mainframe, finisher and large capacity  
tray (LCT).  
Dimensions (W  
690 × 750 × 1,138mm, 27.2" × 29.6" × 44.9"  
×
D
×
H up to exposure glass):  
341  
 
Specification  
Space for mainframe (W  
×
D):  
• 1,265 × 750mm, 49.9" × 29.6" (ADF external extender is not used. Optional  
Output tray is installed.)  
• 1,380 × 750mm, 54" × 30" (ADF external extender is used for larger size  
originals. Optional Output tray is installed.)  
Noise Emission *1  
Sound Power Level:  
• Mainframe only  
:
Type 1  
Type 2  
Stand-by  
Less than 49 dB (A)  
Less than 74 dB (A)  
Less than 71 dB (A)  
Less than 49 dB (A)  
Less than 75 dB (A)  
Less than 71 dB (A)  
During printing (ADF 1 to 1)  
Copying (From Memory)  
• Complete system *3  
Type 1  
Type 2  
Stand-by  
Less than 49 dB (A)  
Less than 73 dB (A)  
Less than 49 dB (A)  
Less than 75 dB (A)  
Less than 71 dB (A)  
During printing (ADF 1 to 1)  
During printing(From Memory) Less than 70 dB (A)  
Sound Pressure Level *2  
• Mainframe only  
:
Type 1  
Type 2  
Stand-by  
Less than 35 dB (A)  
Less than 62 dB (A)  
Less than 35 dB (A)  
Less than 65 dB (A)  
Less than 58 dB (A)  
8
During printing (ADF 1 to 1)  
During printing (From Memory) Less than 57 dB (A)  
• Complete system *3  
Type 1  
Type 2  
Stand-by  
Less than 35 dB (A)  
Less than 62 dB (A)  
Less than 35 dB (A)  
Less than 65 dB (A)  
Less than 58 dB (A)  
During printing (ADF 1 to 1)  
During printing (From Memory) Less than 56 dB (A)  
*1  
*2  
*3  
The above measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779 are actual value.  
It is measured at the position of the bystander.  
The Complete System consists of the mainframe, finisher and large capacity  
tray (LCT).  
Weight:  
Type 1, 2: Approx. 188 kg, 414.5 lb (Mainframe with document feeder)  
342  
     
Document Feeder  
Document Feeder  
Mode:  
ADF mode, Batch (SADF) mode, Mixed Sizes mode, Thin mode  
Original size:  
• A3L – B6KL  
• 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL  
Original weight:  
• 1-sided originals: 52 – 157g/m2 (14 – 42 lb. Bond)  
• 2-sided originals: 52 – 128g/m2 (14 – 34 lb. Bond) (Duplex)  
• Thin original: 41 – 157g/m2 (11 – 42 lb. Bond)  
Number of originals to be set:  
100 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) or less than 12mm, 0.4"  
Note  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
8
343  
   
Specification  
50-Sheet Finisher  
Paper size:  
Proof Tray: A3L – B6L, A6L, 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL  
Shift Tray: A3L – A5KL, 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL  
Staple Mode: A3L – B5KL, 11" × 17"L – 81/2" × 11"KL  
Punch Mode:  
• 2 holes: A3L – A5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL  
• 3 holes: A3L, B4L, A4K, B5K, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 11"K  
• 4 holes:  
• Metric version: A3L, A4K, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 11"K  
• Scandinavian version: A3L – A5K, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L – 51/2" ×  
81/2"K  
Paper weight:  
Stack: 52 – 157g/m2, 14 – 42 lb. Bond  
Staple: 64 – 80g/m2, 17 – 20 lb. Bond  
Punch:  
• 4 holes: 52 – 128g/m2, 14 – 34 lb. Bond  
• 2 or 3 holes: 52 – 157g/m2, 14 lb. Bond – 90 lb. Index  
Stack capacity:  
Proof Tray (without Punch):  
• 250 sheets (A4, 81/2" × 11" or smaller) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• 50 sheets (B4, 81/2" × 14" or larger) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
Proof Tray (with Punch):  
• 200 sheets (A4, 81/2" × 11" or smaller) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• 50 sheets (B4, 81/2" × 14" or larger) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
Shift Tray (without Punch):  
8
• 3,000 sheets (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• 1,500 sheets (except A4K, A5L) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• 100 sheets (A5L) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
Shift Tray (with Punch):  
• 2,500 sheets (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• 1,500 sheets (except A4K, A5L) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• 100 sheets (A5L) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
Staple capacity:  
Without Punch:  
• 2 – 50 sheets (A4, 81/2" × 11" or smaller) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• 2 – 30 sheets (B4, 81/2" × 14" or larger) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
With Punch:  
• 2 – 40 sheets (A4, 81/2" × 11" or smaller) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• 2 – 25 sheets (B4, 81/2" × 14" or larger) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
Staple position:  
Four positions (Top, Top Slant, Bottom, 2 Staples)  
344  
   
50-Sheet Finisher  
Power consumption:  
48W (power is supplied from the mainframe.)  
Dimensions (W  
625 × 545 × 960mm, 24.7" × 21.5 " × 37.8"  
×
D
×
H):  
Weight:  
Approx. 45kg, 99.3 lb  
Note  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
8
345  
Specification  
100-Sheet Finisher  
Paper size:  
Proof Tray: A3L – A5KL, 11" × 17"KL – 51/2" × 81/2"KL  
Shift Tray: A3L – A5KL, 11" × 17"KL – 51/2" × 81/2"KL  
Staple Mode: A3L – B5KL, 11" × 17"L – 81/2" × 11"KL  
Punch Mode:  
• 2 holes: A3L – A5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL  
• 3 holes: A3L, B4L, A4K, B5K, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 11"K  
• 4 holes:  
• Metric version: A3L, A4K, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 11"K  
• Scandinavian version: A3L – A5K, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L – 51/2" ×  
81/2"K  
Paper weight:  
Stack: 52 – 216g/m2, 14 lb. Bond – 80 lb. Covers  
Staple: 64 – 80g/m2, 17 – 20 lb. Bond  
Punch:  
• 4 holes: 52 – 128g/m2, 14 – 34 lb. Bond  
• 2 or 3 holes: 52 – 157g/m2, 14 lb. Bond – 90 lb. Index  
Stack capacity:  
Proof Tray:  
• 500 sheets (A4, 81/2" × 11" or smaller) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• 250 sheets (B4, 81/2" × 14" or larger) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
Shift Tray (without Punch):  
• 3,000 sheets (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• 1,500 sheets (except A4K, A5L) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• 100 sheets (A5L) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
Shift Tray (with Punch):  
8
• 2,500 sheets (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• 1,500 sheets (Others) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
Shift Tray (with Staple):  
• 10 – 100 originals = 200 – 30 sets (A4, 81/2" × 51/2" ) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• 1,500 sheets (B4, 81/2" × 14" or larger) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
Staple capacity:  
• 2 – 100 sheets (A4K, B5K, 81/2" × 11"K) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• 2 – 50 sheets (Others) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
Staple position:  
Five positions (Top, Top Slant, Bottom, Left 2, Top 2)  
Power consumption:  
140W (power is supplied from the mainframe.)  
346  
   
100-Sheet Finisher  
Dimensions (W  
800 × 728 × 980mm, 31.5" × 28.7 " × 38.6"  
×
D
×
H):  
Weight:  
Approx. 50kg, 130.1 lb  
Note  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
8
347  
Specification  
Booklet Finisher  
Paper size:  
Proof Tray: A3L – A5KL, 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL  
Shift Tray: A3L – A5KL, 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL  
Staple Mode:  
• Bottom or Top: A3L – B5K, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 11"KL  
• 2 Staples: A3L, B4L, A4K, B5K, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 11"L  
Saddle Stitch Mode: A3L – A4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 11"L  
Paper weight:  
Stack: 52 – 163g/m2, 14 – 42 lb. Bond  
Staple: 64 – 80g/m2, 17 – 20 lb. Bond  
Saddle Stitch:  
• 64 – 80g/m2, 17 – 20 lb. Bond  
• 64 – 128g/m2, 14 – 34 lb. Cover (up to 1 cover sheet can be stapled.)  
Stack capacity:  
Proof Tray:  
• 150 sheets (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K or smaller) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• 75 sheets (A4L, 81/2" × 11"L or larger) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
Shift Tray (without Staple):  
• 1,000 sheets (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• 500 sheets (A4L, 81/2" × 11"L or larger) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
Shift Tray (with Staple):  
• 750 sheets (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• 500 sheets (A4L, 81/2" × 11"L or larger) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
Booklet Tray:  
8
• 25 sets (1 – 5 sheets, 80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• 15 sets (6 – 10 sheets, 80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• 10 sets (11 – 15 sheets, 80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
Staple capacity:  
Staple Mode:  
• 2 – 50 sheets (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K or smaller) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
• 2 – 30 sheets (A4L, 81/2" × 11"L or larger) (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
Saddle Stitch Mode: 2 – 15 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
Staple position:  
Staple Mode: Five positions (Top, Top Slant, Bottom, Left 2, Top 2)  
Saddle Stitch Mode: One position  
Folding:  
Center folding  
Power consumption:  
60W (power is supplied from the mainframe.)  
348  
   
Booklet Finisher  
Dimensions (W  
689 × 603 × 1,055mm, 27.2" × 23.8 " × 41.6"  
×
D
×
H):  
Weight:  
Approx. 50kg, 130.1 lb  
Note  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
8
349  
Specification  
Punch Kit (Option)  
Paper size  
• 2 holes: A3L – A5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL  
• 3 holes: A3L, B4L, A4K, B5K, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 11"K  
• 4 holes:  
• Metric version: A3L, A4K, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 11"K  
• Scandinavian version: A3L – A5K, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L – 51/2" ×  
81/2"K  
Paper weight:  
• 4 holes: 52 – 128g/m2, 14 – 34 lb. Bond  
• 2 or 3 holes: 52 – 157g/m2, 14 lb. Bond – 90 lb. Index  
Power consumption:  
33.6 W (power is supplied from the mainframe.)  
Dimensions (W  
92 × 463 × 100mm, 3.7" × 18.3" × 4.0"  
×
D
×
H):  
Weight:  
Approx. 2.4 kg, 5.3 lb  
Note  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
8
350  
   
Output Tray (Option)  
Output Tray (Option)  
Paper capacity:  
• A3, 11" × 17" : 250 sheets  
• B4, 81/2" × 14" : 500 sheets  
• A4, 81/2" × 11" : 500 sheets  
• B5, 51/2" × 81/2" : 250 sheets  
Dimensions (W  
390 × 330 × 130mm, 15.4" × 13.0" × 5.2"  
×
D
×
H):  
Weight:  
Approx. 650 g, 1.5 lb  
Note  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
8
351  
   
Specification  
Paper size:  
A4K, B5K, 81/2" × 14"K *1 , 81/2" × 11"K  
The optional 81/2" × 14" paper size tray is required to set this size of paper.  
*1  
Paper weight:  
64 – 105g/m2, 16 – 24 lb. Bond  
Paper capacity:  
3,500 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)  
Power consumption  
Maximum. 48 W (power is supplied from the mainframe.)  
Dimensions (W  
403 × 529 × 608mm, 15.9" × 20.9" × 24.0"  
×
D
×
H, option unit):  
Weight:  
Approx. 22 kg, 48.6 lb  
Note  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
8
352  
     
Copy Connector Cable (Option)  
Copy Connector Cable (Option)  
Continuous copying speed:  
With two 55 copies/minute models:  
• 110 copies/minute (A4L, 81/2" × 11"L)  
• 58 copies/minute (A3L, 11" × 17"L)  
With two 70 copies/minute models:  
• 140 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)  
• 72 copies/minute (A3L, 11" × 17"L)  
With one 55 copies/minute model and one 70 copies/minute model:  
• 125 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)  
• 64 copies/minute (A3L, 11" × 17"L)  
Dimensions (W  
310 × 310 × 65mm, 12.2" × 12.2" × 2.5"  
×
D
×
H):  
Weight:  
Approx. 500g, 1.1 lb  
Length:  
10m  
8
353  
   
INDEX  
Copying  
Connect Copy, 223  
Copy Paper, 23, 43  
100-Sheet Finisher, 7, 346  
50-Sheet Finisher, 7, 344  
Cover  
Back Cover, 151, 154  
Front Cover, 151, 154  
A
Access to the Machine, 336  
Adding Staples, 285  
ADF external tray, 4, 5  
ADF tray, 5  
Date Stamp, 194  
Designate, 156  
Directional Magnification (%), 101  
Directional Size Magnification (inch), 104  
Display, 10  
Auto Off, 30, 235  
Auto Reduce/Enlarge, 47  
Auto Reset, 30, 234  
Auto Start, 90  
Display Panel, 227  
Display panel, 8, 10  
Document Feeder, 343  
Document feeder, 4, 32, 232  
Cleaning, 337  
Document Server, 209  
Deleting, 220  
Features and Benefits, 210  
Printing, 216  
Scanning Originals, 212  
Do's And Don'ts, 333  
Double Copies, 165  
B
Back Cover, 151, 154  
Background Numbering, 181  
Basic functions, 40  
Batch (SADF) mode, 36  
Booklet Finisher, 7, 225, 348  
Book originals, copying, 137, 140  
Border Erase, 172, 173  
Bypass tray, 5, 73  
C
E
Center/Border Erase, 172, 177  
Center Erase, 172, 175  
Centering, 179  
Energy Saver mode, 88  
Enlarging, 94  
Environment, 334  
Changing Paper  
Tray 2, 282  
Border, 172, 173  
Center, 172, 175  
Center/Border, 172, 177  
Exposure glass, 4, 19, 31  
Cleaning, 337  
Changing the Paper Size, 282  
Changing the Toner Bottle, 268  
Chapters, 158  
Clearing Misfeeds, 270  
Clear Modes/Energy Saver key, 8  
Clear/Stop key, 9  
Extender, 74  
Combination Chart, 206  
Combine, 107, 115  
Connect Copy, 223, 225, 230, 353  
Document Server, 226  
Exiting, 235  
Interrupt, 226  
Relationship, 239  
Connect Copy port, 5  
Control Panel, 8  
Control panel, 4  
File Merge Printing, 211  
Finisher, 225  
100-Sheet Finisher, 7  
50-Sheet Finisher, 7  
Booklet Finisher, 7  
Front Cover, 151, 154  
Front cover, 4  
Function indicators, 9  
Function Status indicator, 9  
354  
 
I
Image Density, 40, 41  
Image Repeat, 167  
Indicators, 8  
Interrupt Copy, 88  
Interrupt key, 8  
Page Numbering, 198  
Paper  
Changing, 282  
Loading, 263  
Paper tray, 4  
Power Connection, 335  
Preset Stamp, 183  
Program  
J
Job Preset, 83  
Changing, 80  
Deleting, 80  
Recalling, 81  
L
Storing, 78  
Large Capacity Tray (LCT), 7, 352  
Program key, 8  
Programs, 78  
Punching copies, 69  
Punch kit, 350  
Loading Paper, 263  
Large Capacity Tray (LCT), 266  
Tray 1, 263  
Tray 2, 265  
Tray 3, 265  
M
Reduce/Enlarge, 94  
Reducing, 94  
Remarks, 333  
Removing Jammed Staples, 293  
Removing Punch Waste, 301  
Repeat  
Machine Environment, 334  
Mainframe, 339  
Main power indicator, 8  
Main power switch, 4, 17  
Maintenance, 337  
Image Repeat, 167  
Margin Adjustment, 170  
Master unit, 225  
Messages, 247  
S
Misfeeds, 270  
Mixed Sizes mode, 37  
Safety information, i  
Sample Copy, 91  
Sample Copy key, 8  
Screen Contrast knob, 8  
Series Copies, 137, 138  
Slip Sheets, 151, 162  
Sort, 52  
Sorting copies into sets, 55  
Specification, 339  
100-Sheet Finisher, 346  
50-Sheet Finisher, 344  
Booklet Finisher, 348  
Connect Copy, 353  
Document Feeder, 343  
Large Capacity Tray (LCT), 352  
Mainframe, 339  
N
Numbering  
Background Numbering, 181  
Page Numbering, 198  
Number keys, 9  
O
On Demand Printing, 210  
On indicator, 4, 8  
Operation switch, 4, 8, 17  
Options, 7  
Original Beeper, 91  
Original Mode Quality Level, 226  
Originals, 19, 231  
Output Tray, 351  
Punch kit, 350  
Originals, setting, 31  
Original Type, selecting, 42  
Output Tray, 351  
Stack, 52, 58  
Output tray, 4, 7  
Output tray guide, 4, 6  
355  
Stamp, 181  
Background Numbering, 181  
Date Stamp, 194  
Page Numbering, 198  
Preset Stamp, 183  
User Stamp, 186  
Staple, 52  
Staples, 285  
Removing Jammed Staples, 293  
Stapling copies, 60  
Start key, 9  
Sub-unit, 225  
T
Thin mode, 39  
Toner, 27  
Toner Bottle  
Changing, 268  
Storage, 27  
Two-sided Copies, 107, 111  
U
User Codes, 90  
User Stamp, 186  
User Tools  
Copy/Document Server Features, 305  
Settings, 310  
User Tools/Counter key, 8  
V
Ventilation hole, 6  
Z
Zoom, 97  
356  
UE USA A293  

Toshiba E Studio 4540c User Manual
Savin Dsc332 User Manual
Sanyo Twicell Hf A1u User Manual
Sanyo Spw K075xh User Manual
MAKITA HR5211C User Manual
GE ACV24D User Manual
DELL ULTRASHARP U2717DA User Manual
CRAFTSMAN 917.259580 User Manual
CRAFTSMAN 139.53525SRT User Manual
ASUS VIVOMINI VC66D User Manual